TAC Vista WorkstationOperating Manual
TAC Vista WorkstationOperating Manual
Copyright © 2007 TAC AB. All rights reserved.
This document, as well as the product it refers to, is only intended for licensed users. TAC AB owns the copyright of this document and reserves the right to make changes, additions or deletions. TAC AB assumes no responsibility for possible mistakes or errors that might appear in this document.
Do not use the product for other purposes than those indicated in this document.
Only licensed users of the product and the document are permitted to use the document or any information therein. Distribution, disclosure, copying, storing or use of the product, the information or the illustrations in the document on the part of non-licensed users, in electronic or mechanical form, as a recording or by other means, including photo copying or information storage and retrieval systems, without the express written permission of TAC AB, will be regarded as a violation of copyright laws and is strictly prohibited.
Trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual Contents
Contents
INTRODUCTION
1 About this Manual 131.1 Structure ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 131.2 Typographic Conventions ……………………………………………………………………………… 141.3 Prerequisites ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 141.4 Terminology………………………………………………………………………………………………… 151.4.1 Database Terminology ……………………………………………………………………………….. 151.4.2 Network Terms and Concepts……………………………………………………………………… 17
GETTING STARTED
2 User Interface 232.1 The User Interface………………………………………………………………………………………… 232.2 Main Window………………………………………………………………………………………………. 262.2.1 Title Bar …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 262.2.2 Standard Microsoft Windows Menu and Buttons…………………………………………… 272.2.3 Main Menu……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 282.2.4 Customizing the Main Menu……………………………………………………………………….. 292.2.5 Main Toolbar…………………………………………………………………………………………….. 302.2.6 Main Shortcut Menu ………………………………………………………………………………….. 312.2.7 Panes Overview…………………………………………………………………………………………. 322.2.8 Using Panes………………………………………………………………………………………………. 332.2.9 Windows Overview……………………………………………………………………………………. 342.2.10 Status Bar …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 352.3 Using the History Buttons ……………………………………………………………………………… 362.4 Drag and Drop in TAC Vista Workstation ………………………………………………………. 372.5 Keyboard Shortcuts ………………………………………………………………………………………. 382.6 Alarm Icon on the System Tray ……………………………………………………………………… 392.7 Customizing the User Interface………………………………………………………………………. 402.7.1 Customizing Overview ………………………………………………………………………………. 402.7.2 Choosing and Moving Columns in a List ……………………………………………………… 412.7.3 Creating a New Menu and Adding Commands ……………………………………………… 432.7.4 Creating a New Toolbar and Adding Commands …………………………………………… 432.7.5 Adding a New Command to the Tools Menu ………………………………………………… 442.8 Program Settings for TAC Vista Workstation ………………………………………………….. 45
3 Starting or Stopping TAC Vista Server/Workstation 473.1 TAC Vista Server/Workstation Overview ……………………………………………………….. 473.2 Starting TAC Vista Server …………………………………………………………………………….. 483.3 Stopping TAC Vista Server …………………………………………………………………………… 48
TAC AB, Sept 2007 5 (240)04-00022-02-en
Contents TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
3.4 Starting TAC Vista Workstation …………………………………………………………………….. 483.5 Stopping TAC Vista Workstation …………………………………………………………………… 48
4 Logging in and Logging out 494.1 Logging in, Logging out and Standby Mode…………………………………………………….. 494.2 Logging in as a Vista User …………………………………………………………………………….. 504.2.1 Logging in to a Local Vista Server (Vista User)…………………………………………….. 504.2.2 Logging in to a Remote Vista Server (Vista User) …………………………………………. 514.2.3 Changing Your Password (Vista User) …………………………………………………………. 524.3 Logging in as a Windows User ………………………………………………………………………. 534.3.1 Logging in to a Local Vista Server (Currently Logged-in Windows User) ………… 534.3.2 Logging in to a Remote Vista Server (Currently Logged-in Windows User)……… 544.3.3 Logging in to a Remote Vista Server (Windows User)……………………………………. 554.4 Logging Out…………………………………………………………………………………………………. 564.5 Activating Standby Mode………………………………………………………………………………. 564.6 Change Mode……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 56
5 Alarms 575.1 Alarms Overview………………………………………………………………………………………….. 575.1.1 Opening the Alarms Pane……………………………………………………………………………. 585.1.2 Alarm States in the Alarms List …………………………………………………………………… 595.1.3 Updating the Alarms List ……………………………………………………………………………. 605.1.4 Resizing Columns in the Alarms List……………………………………………………………. 605.1.5 Acknowledging Alarms………………………………………………………………………………. 605.1.6 Opening Linked Objects……………………………………………………………………………… 635.1.7 Viewing Events for an Alarm………………………………………………………………………. 645.1.8 Viewing the Signal Tripping the Alarm ………………………………………………………… 655.1.9 Filtering the Alarms List …………………………………………………………………………….. 655.1.10 Disabling Alarms……………………………………………………………………………………….. 675.1.11 Interlocking an Alarm ………………………………………………………………………………… 685.1.12 Purging an Alarm ………………………………………………………………………………………. 715.1.13 Printing the Alarms List ……………………………………………………………………………… 715.1.14 Creating an Online Chart…………………………………………………………………………….. 725.1.15 Creating a Trend Log …………………………………………………………………………………. 725.1.16 Viewing a Trend Chart for an Alarm ……………………………………………………………. 735.1.17 Selecting Colors for the Alarms List …………………………………………………………….. 745.1.18 Selecting Columns in the Alarms List…………………………………………………………… 755.2 Disabling Alarms………………………………………………………………………………………….. 765.2.1 Opening the Disabled Alarms Pane………………………………………………………………. 765.2.2 Alarm States in the Disabled Alarms List ……………………………………………………… 775.2.3 Resizing Columns in the Disabled Alarms List ……………………………………………… 785.2.4 Enabling Disabled Alarms…………………………………………………………………………… 795.2.5 Removing Interlock for an Alarm ………………………………………………………………… 805.2.6 Printing the Disabled Alarms List ………………………………………………………………… 815.2.7 Viewing Events for a Disabled Alarm ………………………………………………………….. 825.2.8 Selecting Colors for the Disabled Alarms List……………………………………………….. 835.2.9 Selecting Columns in the Disabled Alarms List …………………………………………….. 84
6 Graphics 856.1 Graphics Overview……………………………………………………………………………………….. 856.2 Navigate Graphics ………………………………………………………………………………………… 85
6 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual Contents
6.3 Searching for Graphics………………………………………………………………………………….. 886.4 Opening a Graphic ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 906.5 Changing a Value in a Graphic ………………………………………………………………………. 926.6 Viewing Events for a Value in a Graphic ………………………………………………………… 936.7 Creating an Online Chart for a Value in a Graphic……………………………………………. 936.8 Viewing a Trend Chart for a Value in a Graphic ………………………………………………. 946.9 Zooming in and out of a Graphic ……………………………………………………………………. 956.10 Scrolling a Graphic ………………………………………………………………………………………. 966.11 Opening an Attached Notes Object…………………………………………………………………. 976.12 Printing a Graphic ………………………………………………………………………………………… 98
7 Notes 997.1 Notes Overview……………………………………………………………………………………………. 997.2 Opening a Notes Object ………………………………………………………………………………… 1007.3 Editing a Notes Object ………………………………………………………………………………….. 1017.4 Printing a Notes Object …………………………………………………………………………………. 102
8 Hyperlink 1038.1 Hyperlink Overview……………………………………………………………………………………… 1038.2 Opening a Hyperlink Object ………………………………………………………………………….. 103
9 Trend Charts 1059.1 Trend Charts Overview …………………………………………………………………………………. 1059.2 Creating a Trend Chart………………………………………………………………………………….. 1069.3 Opening a Trend Chart………………………………………………………………………………….. 1079.4 Adding Trend logs to an Open Trend Chart……………………………………………………… 1089.5 Editing a Trend Chart……………………………………………………………………………………. 1109.6 Viewing a Trend Chart………………………………………………………………………………….. 1119.7 Deleting a Trend Chart………………………………………………………………………………….. 1149.8 Printing a Trend Chart…………………………………………………………………………………… 1159.9 Viewing Events from Trend Chart ………………………………………………………………….. 1169.10 Viewing Estimated and Edited Values…………………………………………………………….. 1179.11 Viewing an I/NET Trend Chart………………………………………………………………………. 119
10 Reports 12110.1 Reports Overview…………………………………………………………………………………………. 12110.1.1 Reports …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 12110.1.2 Report Copies……………………………………………………………………………………………. 12110.2 Opening a Report …………………………………………………………………………………………. 12210.3 Opening a Report Copy…………………………………………………………………………………. 12310.4 Printing a Report ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 124
11 Events 12511.1 Events Overview ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 12511.2 Opening the Events Pane ………………………………………………………………………………. 12611.3 Refreshing the Events List …………………………………………………………………………….. 12611.4 Resizing Columns in the Events List ………………………………………………………………. 12611.5 Viewing an Event in Detail ……………………………………………………………………………. 12711.6 Filtering Events in the Events List ………………………………………………………………….. 12811.7 Viewing Events for an Object ………………………………………………………………………… 13011.8 Viewing Events for an Alarm ………………………………………………………………………… 13111.9 Finding a Text in the Events List ……………………………………………………………………. 132
TAC AB, Sept 2007 7 (240)04-00022-02-en
Contents TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
11.10 Printing the Events List …………………………………………………………………………………. 13211.11 Selecting Columns in the Events List………………………………………………………………. 134
12 Searching 13512.1 Search Overview ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 13512.2 Searching for Objects/Devices ……………………………………………………………………….. 136
13 Status Watch 14113.1 Status Watch Overview …………………………………………………………………………………. 14113.2 Adding Objects/Values to the Status Watch Pane……………………………………………… 14113.3 Deactivating/Activating Values in the Status Watch Pane………………………………….. 14213.4 Creating an Online Chart……………………………………………………………………………….. 14313.5 Using the Create Trend Log Wizard ……………………………………………………………….. 14413.6 Viewing a Trend Chart ………………………………………………………………………………….. 14413.7 Removing Objects/Values from the Status Watch Pane …………………………………….. 144
14 Viewing/Changing Values 14514.1 Viewing/Changing Values Overview………………………………………………………………. 14514.2 Viewing Values in the Object View………………………………………………………………… 14614.3 Selecting Columns in the Object View ……………………………………………………………. 14814.4 Changing a Value in the Object View……………………………………………………………… 14914.5 Enter an Electronic Signature when Changing a Value ……………………………………… 15014.6 Viewing Values in the Status Watch Pane ……………………………………………………….. 15114.7 Changing a Value in the Status Watch Pane …………………………………………………….. 15214.8 Xenta Server Pages Overview ………………………………………………………………………… 15214.8.1 Help for the Xenta Server Pages ………………………………………………………………….. 152
15 Online Charts 15315.1 Online Charts Overview ………………………………………………………………………………… 15315.2 Creating an Online Chart……………………………………………………………………………….. 15415.3 Opening an Online Chart……………………………………………………………………………….. 15515.4 Adding Values to an Open Online Chart………………………………………………………….. 15615.5 Editing an Online Chart…………………………………………………………………………………. 15715.6 Deleting an Online Chart……………………………………………………………………………….. 15815.7 Printing an Online Chart………………………………………………………………………………… 158
16 Trend Logging 15916.1 Trend Logging Overview ………………………………………………………………………………. 15916.1.1 Trend Logging…………………………………………………………………………………………… 15916.1.2 The Trend Log Wizards ……………………………………………………………………………… 16016.2 Creating a Vista Server Trend Log Using the Create Trend Log Wizard ……………… 16116.3 Creating a Xenta Trend Log Using the Create Trend Log Wizard ………………………. 16616.4 Trend Log Profiles………………………………………………………………………………………… 17016.4.1 Using the Trend Log Profiles ………………………………………………………………………. 17016.5 Viewing a Trend Chart ………………………………………………………………………………….. 17016.6 Viewing Logged Values in a Trend Log as a Table …………………………………………… 17116.7 Viewing Logged Values in a Trend Chart………………………………………………………… 17216.8 Viewing Logged Values on a Trend Page………………………………………………………… 17216.9 Copying Trend Log Values to Microsoft Excel ………………………………………………… 17316.10 Printing Trend Log Values …………………………………………………………………………….. 17416.11 Editing Trend Log Values ……………………………………………………………………………… 17516.12 Checking Edited Trend Log Values ………………………………………………………………… 176
8 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual Contents
16.13 I/NET Trend Samples …………………………………………………………………………………… 17816.13.1 Adding/opening an I/NET Trend Sample ……………………………………………………… 17816.13.2 Editing an I/NET Trend Sample ………………………………………………………………….. 18016.13.3 Deleting an I/NET Trend Sample ………………………………………………………………… 180
17 Time Functions 18117.1 Time Charts Overview ………………………………………………………………………………….. 18117.2 Time Charts …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 18217.2.1 Opening a Time Chart………………………………………………………………………………… 18217.2.2 Overviewing a Time Chart………………………………………………………………………….. 18317.2.3 Adding an Event in a Time Chart ………………………………………………………………… 18417.2.4 Editing an Event in a Time Chart…………………………………………………………………. 18517.2.5 Deleting an Event in a Time Chart……………………………………………………………….. 18617.3 TAC Xenta Time Charts ……………………………………………………………………………….. 18717.3.1 Opening a TAC Xenta Time Chart ………………………………………………………………. 18717.3.2 Adding an Event in a TAC Xenta Time Chart……………………………………………….. 18817.3.3 Editing an Event in a TAC Xenta Time Chart ……………………………………………….. 18917.3.4 Deleting an Event in a TAC Xenta Time Chart ……………………………………………… 19017.3.5 Replacing a TAC Xenta Time Chart with a Central Time Chart………………………. 19117.4 I/NET Time Schedule …………………………………………………………………………………… 19217.4.1 I/NET Time Schedule ………………………………………………………………………………… 192
18 Dial-up Communication 19518.1 Dial-Up Communication Overview ………………………………………………………………… 19518.2 Monitoring a Dial-Up Connection in Progress …………………………………………………. 196
19 I/NET Features 19719.1 The I/NET Host Tool ……………………………………………………………………………………. 19719.1.1 I/NET Host Tool Overview…………………………………………………………………………. 19719.1.2 I/NET Licenses …………………………………………………………………………………………. 19719.1.3 Launch the I/NET Host Tool ………………………………………………………………………. 20019.2 I/NET Points………………………………………………………………………………………………… 20119.2.1 I/NET Points Overview………………………………………………………………………………. 20119.2.2 I/NET Point Types …………………………………………………………………………………….. 20119.2.3 Viewing I/NET Points………………………………………………………………………………… 20519.2.4 Selecting an I/NET Point ……………………………………………………………………………. 20619.2.5 Using Point-specific Features ……………………………………………………………………… 20719.2.6 Controlling an I/NET Point…………………………………………………………………………. 20819.2.7 Setting a Point’s Message Routing Parameters………………………………………………. 21019.3 I/NET Point Extensions…………………………………………………………………………………. 21219.3.1 Edit an I/NET Point Extension…………………………………………………………………….. 21419.4 I/NET Alarms, Messages, and Transactions …………………………………………………….. 21519.4.1 Viewing I/NET Alarms and Transactions……………………………………………………… 21519.4.2 Acknowledging I/NET Alarms ……………………………………………………………………. 21619.4.3 Purging I/NET Alarms ……………………………………………………………………………….. 21619.4.4 Filtering Alarms ………………………………………………………………………………………… 217
REFERENCE
20 Trend Log Profiles 22120.1 Temperature per hour ……………………………………………………………………………………. 221
TAC AB, Sept 2007 9 (240)04-00022-02-en
Contents TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
20.2 Average Temperature per day ………………………………………………………………………… 22220.3 Heating per 24 hours (before midnight) …………………………………………………………… 22320.4 Heating per 24 hours (after midnight) ……………………………………………………………… 22420.5 Electricity per hour ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 22520.6 Electricity per 24 hours (before midnight) ……………………………………………………….. 22620.7 Electricity per 24 hours (after midnight) ………………………………………………………….. 22720.8 Water per 24 hours (before midnight) ……………………………………………………………… 22820.9 Water per 24 hours (after midnight) ………………………………………………………………… 22920.10 Carbon Dioxide (CO2) every 10 minutes …………………………………………………………. 23020.11 Log a Generic Value every 10 Minutes……………………………………………………………. 231
Index 233
10 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
INTRODUCTION
1 About this Manual
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 1 About this Manual
1 About this ManualThis manual describes a particular process. For information on certain products, we refer you to the manual for the product in question.
For information on how to install software, we refer you to the instruc-tions delivered with the software.
If you discover errors and/or unclear descriptions in this manual, please contact your TAC representative.
1.1 StructureThe manual is divided into the following parts:
• Introduction The Introduction section contains information on how this manual is structured and how it should be used to find information in the most efficient way.
• Getting Started The Getting Started section contains a step-by-step description of how to engineer or carry out the tasks described in this manual.
• Reference The Reference section contains more comprehensive information about various parts of the Getting Started section. It also provides you with information on alternative solutions not covered by the Getting Started section.
Note
• We are continuously improving and correcting our documenta-tion. This manual may have been updated.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 13 (240)04-00022-02-en
1 About this Manual TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
1.2 Typographic ConventionsThroughout the manual the following specially marked texts may occur.
1.3 PrerequisitesThis document is intended for users with basic computer skills includ-ing a working knowledge of Microsoft Windows, Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel. It is also beneficial that the user is familiar with using a web browser.
! Warning
• Alerts you that failure to take, or avoid, a specific action might result in physical harm to you or to the hardware.
Caution
• Alerts you to possible data loss, breaches of security, or other more serious problems.
Important
• Alerts you to supplementary information that is essential to the completion of a task.
Note
• Alerts you to supplementary information.
Tip
• Alerts you to supplementary information that is not essential to the completion of the task at hand.
Advanced
• Alerts you that the following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
14 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 1 About this Manual
1.4 Terminology
1.4.1 Database Terminology
Term Description
Database A database is a form of digital archive for stor-ing information. A database can have many lev-els of information, usually in the form of a tree with branches, sub branches and objects.
Root A database always has a top level, also known as the root or root level.
Branch A branch is a sublevel of the database contain-ing subbranches and leaves.
Examples of branches:
• A branch can be a folder that contains a number of subfolders and objects, where each subfolder contains a number of sub-folders and or objects.
• A branch can also be a Vista Server, with a LonWorks network, containing a number of Xenta Groups and Xenta Devices, where each Xenta device contains applica-tions and signals.
Folder A folder in a Vista database is a type of branch that can contain other folders (subfolders) and objects. In a previous version of Vista, folders were known as Logical Units, but this term is no longer used.
Device In a Vista database, the term Device refers to communication ports, networks and control devices (for example Xenta devices) and so on. A network can contain other devices, for exam-ple group devices. A control device normally contains applications, modules, signals, and trend logs and so on. In a previous version of Vista, Devices were known as Physical Units, but this term is no longer used.
Object In a Vista database, objects can for example be; graphics, signals, shortcuts, reports, trend logs and so on. Objects may be created beneath the Vista Server object, devices and folders.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 15 (240)04-00022-02-en
1 About this Manual TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
Shortcut A shortcut refers to another object in the Vista database. A shortcut called. “Temperature Set-point” can, for example, refer to an analog input in a Xenta device.
• Primary Shortcut. The first shortcut cre-ated for another object is known as the pri-mary shortcut. It is a protected object that cannot be deleted without changing the authority settings for the object. This is to prevent the removal of a primary shortcut by mistake.
Global objects Global objects are objects that have settings affecting a whole Vista system.Global objects are stored in the root of the Vista database and are visible on all Vista Servers in a Vista net-work/system. Changes to global objects are communicated by the Master Vista Server throughout a Vista network/system.
Properties The properties refers to the properties (attributes) for the devices, folders and objects in the Vista database.
Each object has a number of properties for example the value of the object, the description of the object and so on.
The properties are displayed in a dialog box or a specially designed dialog box. To see the properties of an object, right-click the object in the object view and then click Properties.
• Description. This is a property that all objects in the Vista database has. The description property should be used for entering information describing the object.
Term Description
16 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 1 About this Manual
1.4.2 Network Terms and Concepts
Term Description
Site The term Site refers to the buildings and equipment controlled/managed by TAC equipment/devices and systems, for example Xenta and Vista.
Network A network is a number of nodes forming a common connection.
Examples of networks:
• A LonWorks network consisting of Xenta Groups, Xenta Devices and LonWorks Devices.
• A computer network formed by connecting a num-ber of computers. There are two generic types of computer networks:
Local Area Network (LAN). A LAN is a network containing a number of nodes, for example Vista serv-ers, that are connected within a limited area. A typical example of a LAN is a network of computers in an office building. The network may vary in size from just a few computers to several hundred of them, depend-ing on the kinds of transmission media used.
Wide Area Network (WAN). A WAN consists of computers spread over a wide area where the connec-tions are not necessarily permanent. In fact, these often use dial-up connections. Several LANs may be con-nected to a WAN using a modem, router, or the like. Any type of media can be used for communicating on this type of network.
Node This is a generic term for a connection in a network.
Examples:
• A computer in a computer network
• An Xenta device in a LonWorks network.
Computer or PC.
Every computer, or PC, is identified by a name. This computer can be the PC in your room or a server, for example a network server, a web server or a Vista Server. A computer usually forms part of a domain.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 17 (240)04-00022-02-en
1 About this Manual TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
Server The term Server can refer to server software. for exam-ple a network server, a Vista Server or a Xenta Server. But often, it also refers to the computer running the server software.
• Vista Server. A computer running the Vista Server software is referred to as a Vista Server and repre-sented by a Vista Server object in the Vista data-base. A Vista Server object has the same name that the computer has in Windows. The Vista Server object contains the site network and devices that are connected to that particular Vista Server.
For example:
VistaSRV_1 (Vista Server) ACME_Inc (LonWorks Network)
1ST_Floor (TAC Xenta Group) Conf_Room (TAC Xenta)
• Local Vista Server or Local Server.Vista Server is referred to as a Local Vista Server or a Local Server, if running on the same computer as the one where you are running Vista Workstation.
• Remote Vista Server or Remote Server. Vista Server is referred to as a Remote Vista Server or a Remote Server, if running on another computer than the one where you are running Vista Worksta-tion.
• Master Vista Server or Master. In a Vista net-work/system containing several Vista Servers, one of the Vista Servers is the Master Vista Server, managing and communicating system-specific information and global settings throughout the Vista network/system
• Slave Vista Server or Slave. The Slave Vista Servers in a Vista system receive system-specific information and global settings from the Master in the Vista network/system.
• Xenta Server. A Xenta 500/700/913 can act as a Xenta Server in Vista for a LonWorks network, an I/NET network, a MicroNet network, and/or third party networks, such as Modbus. The Xenta Server serves Vista with all the information avail-able on those networks.
Term Description
18 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 1 About this Manual
Client The term Client can refer to client software, for exam-ple a web browser, Vista Workstation, that communi-cates with server software, for example a web server, or a Vista Server. But often, it also refers to the com-puter running the client software. Other examples of clients are Vista Webstation and Vista ScreenMate.
• Vista Workstation. A computer running the Vista Workstation software is referred to as a Vista Workstation.
Domain Networks are usually divided into smaller areas known as domains. Domains contain a number of users, groups and computers. They are defined by the system managers of the network. When logging on to the net-work, you also specify the network domain you wish to enter. Each domain has a domain controller, which supervises users logging on to the domain by checking that the correct password is used.
User Group
Users are divided into groups by system managers. These groups are created in order to group together users who are to have the same level rights and author-ity in the network. A user can be a member of more than one group.
User, User Account or Account
As a user of a network or system, you receive a user account from the system managers of the network or system. A user account has a user name and a pass-word, which are used to identify you when logging in.
Term Description
TAC AB, Sept 2007 19 (240)04-00022-02-en
1 About this Manual TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
20 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
GETTING STARTED
2 User Interface3 Starting or Stopping TAC Vista
Server/Workstation4 Logging in and Logging out5 Alarms6 Graphics7 Notes8 Hyperlink9 Trend Charts
10 Reports11 Events12 Searching13 Status Watch14 Viewing/Changing Values15 Online Charts16 Trend Logging17 Time Functions18 Dial-up Communication19 I/NET Features
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 2 User Interface
2 User Interface
2.1 The User Interface
Tip
• Use the mouse to point at the image to see tooltips containing the names of different parts of the Vista Workstation User Interface.
Fig. 2.1: Overview of the Vista Workstation Interface
TAC AB, Sept 2007 23 (240)04-00022-02-en
2 User Interface TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
The Taskbar in Microsoft Windows
1 Taskbar.
The taskbar is usually displayed at the bottom of the desktop in Windows.
The taskbar displays:
Start button. The Start button opens the start menu which is used for starting programs and managing Windows.
Taskbar buttons. Each program running in Windows has a button on the taskbar, unless the program is running as a service.
Status area. The status area is farthest to the right of the taskbar. Some programs and functions in Windows display icons in the sta-tus area.
The TAC Vista Workstation Main Window
The main window for Vista Workstation contains:
2 Title Bar. At the top a of every window, you will find the title bar. The title bar for Vista Workstation contains the following informa-tion:
• Program icon. Clicking on the program icon opens the Win-dow menu.
• Name of the Vista Server.
• Name of the user currently logged into the Vista Server.
• The standard Windows buttons.
Menu bar. The main menu for Vista Workstation is located on the menu bar, which is located immediately underneath the title bar.
Toolbar. Located immediately underneath the menu bar, the main toolbar provides access to the main features and the panes in Vista Workstation.
3 Workspace. The main window, in which the panes and windows in Vista Workstation are displayed, is viewed inside the workspace (gray background).
Panes. Panes are special types of windows that can be attached to the inner edge of the main window and hidden from view. These panes have their own toolbars, shortcut menus, and/or buttons.
4 The folders pane and the search pane is by default displayed as panes attached to left inner side of the main window.
24 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 2 User Interface
5 The following panes, are by default attached to the lower inner side of the main window:
• Alarms
• Disabled Alarms
• Events
• Search Result 1
• Search Result 2
6 The status watch pane is by default attached to the right inner side of the main window.
Windows. The windows of Vista Workstation are used to display the contents and objects from the Vista database.
Some of the windows have their own toolbars and shortcut menus. They also have the standard window buttons, for example Minimize, Maxi-mize, Restore, and Close.
7 The following types of windows can be displayed in the main win-dow of Vista Workstation:
• object view
• graphics
• online charts
• trend charts
• alarm view
• event view
8 Status bar. The status bar contains information about the state/progress of the current action or request. For instance, if a dial-up connection is attempting to be connected, the status bar will dis-play the current connection status.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 25 (240)04-00022-02-en
2 User Interface TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
2.2 Main Window
2.2.1 Title Bar
In the title bar, the name of the current program is displayed (that is Vista Workstation). The title bar also displays the user name of the per-son currently logged into the system.
The name of the user and the computer will be displayed using the fol-lowing format, <user name>@<computer>, for example
TAC Vista Workstation — Logged in: [email protected]
In addition, the title bar also displays information about the path to the location in the database that you have selected, while browsing the data-base using the folders pane or the object view.
26 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 2 User Interface
2.2.2 Standard Microsoft Windows Menu and Buttons
In Windows, windows can be moved and resized using the mouse. In every window a menu and buttons are also available, to manage the size of the window and to close the window/program.
The Window Menu
The Window menu is activated by clicking the program icon on the title bar in the upper left corner (left side of the title bar).
The Window Buttons
The Window buttons are to be found on the title bar in the upper right corner of a window.
Command Comment
Restore Restores a maximized window to its previous size.
Move Used to move the window.
Size Used to set the size of the window.
Minimize Minimizes the window, displaying only a task-bar button on the taskbar.
For windows within Vista Workstation, a mini-mized window is displayed on the background of the main window.
Maximize Maximizes the window, to the maximum size allowed on the desktop.
For windows within Vista Workstation, the window is maximized to the visible size of the background of the main window.
Close (ALT+F4) Closes the Vista Workstation.
For panes and windows within Vista Worksta-tion, this command closes the window.
Next (CTRL+F6) This command will only be available if the pro-gram has more than one window open in the main window. The command selects the next open window.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 27 (240)04-00022-02-en
2 User Interface TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
2.2.3 Main Menu
The menus on the main menu
The following menus are always available on the main menu:
• File
• View
• Tools
• Window – This menu is only available when one or more win-dows are open in the main windows of Vista Workstation.
• Help
The other menus in the main menu are only available when a specific type of window is the active one in the main window of Vista Worksta-tion. This applies to the following menus.
Tips
• Toggling commands in the View menu:
• The commands for the panes (folders, search, alarms, events, dis-abled alarms and status watch) are toggling commands.
• This means that the first time you click the command for a pane, the pane will open. The next time you click the command, the pane will close.
• The icons for the open panes are displayed with a frame around them, both in the View menu and on the main toolbar of Vista Workstation.
Menu Active Window
Alarm View Alarm view
Event View Event view
Objects Object view
Graphics Graphic
Online Chart Online chart
Trend Chart Trend chart
28 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 2 User Interface
2.2.4 Customizing the Main Menu
To customize the main menu
Not all commands are displayed at the same time in the menus of Vista Workstation.Some commands are hidden and the most recently used commands are displayed first in the menus. This is in compliance with a feature introduced by Microsoft which limits how much is displayed in menus.
If you wish to see the full content of a menu, click the button, or point to a menu and wait for all the remaining commands to appear.
If you want to see the full content of the menus at all times, you can change a setting in Vista Workstation that will enable the menus to be fully displayed.
To show the full contents of the menus without a delay
1 Right-click the menu bar, and then click Customize.
2 In the Customize dialog box, click the Options tab.
3 Clear Menus show recently used commands first.
4 Click OK.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 29 (240)04-00022-02-en
2 User Interface TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
2.2.5 Main Toolbar
The main toolbar contains some of the commands available in the main menu of Vista Workstation. The main toolbar is also referred to as the standard toolbar.
Log in
Log out
Operating / Engineering
Folders
Search
Alarms
Events
Disabled Alarms
Status Watch
Back
Forward
Cascade Windows
Tile Vertically
Tile Horizontally
Help
30 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 2 User Interface
2.2.6 Main Shortcut Menu
The main shortcut menu contains some of the commands available in the main menu of Vista Workstation.
Folders
Search
Alarms
Events
Disabled Alarms
Status Watch
Search Result 1
Search Result 2
Standard Toolbar
Customize
TAC AB, Sept 2007 31 (240)04-00022-02-en
2 User Interface TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
2.2.7 Panes Overview
In Vista Workstation, the following windows are referred to as panes:
• Folders
• Search
• Search Result 1
• Search Result 2
• Alarms
• Events
• Disabled Alarms
• Status Watch
The panes are attached to the inner edge of the main window. They can be activated from the main menu, the main toolbar or the shortcut menu.
A pane can be moved from its position and attached to another edge of the main window. Panes attached to the edge of the main window can be stacked on each other, displaying a tab for each pane.
Panes can be hidden, displayed only as tabs along the edge of the main window. Pointing or clicking on the tab of a hidden pane displays it. Hiding panes provides more space for the other windows in Vista Workstation, for example graphics, object view and so on.
Buttons available for the panes
/ . Auto Hide. These are the buttons for hiding or unhiding the pane.
Close. This is the button for closing the pane.
32 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 2 User Interface
2.2.8 Using Panes
To move a pane
1 Grab the title bar (upper edge) of pane you wish to move, using the left mouse button.
2 Drag the pane to a new position at the inner edge of the main win-dow.
To hide a pane
1 In the upper right corner of the pane, click Auto Hide .
2 The pane becomes hidden, displayed only as a tab along the inner edge of the main window. If the pane was stacked together with other panes, all the panes are hidden, displaying a tab for each pane.
To display a hidden pane
1 Point to or click the tab for the hidden pane, at the edge of the main window.
2 The hidden pane will be displayed, and when you click some-where else it becomes hidden again.
To unhide a pane
1 Point on the tab of the hidden pane, at the edge of the main win-dow.
2 In the upper right corner of the window, click Auto Hide .
3 The pane becomes attached to the edge of the main window. If there is more than one tab, all the hidden panes will be displayed with one tab for each one.
To close a pane
• In the upper right corner of the pane, click Close .
TAC AB, Sept 2007 33 (240)04-00022-02-en
2 User Interface TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
2.2.9 Windows Overview
The following windows in Vista Workstation are referred to as win-dows:
• Object View
• Graphics
• Online Charts
• Trend Charts
• Alarm View
• Event View
By default, all windows are only displayed in one instance each. If you choose to use the Open in New Window command, several instances of each type of window can be displayed at the same time.
Buttons available for the windows
Each window has its own tab. The tabs are displayed below the menu bar in Vista Workstation. The tabs have the following buttons:
When the windows are maximized, the following buttons appear in the upper right corner of the menu bar, just below the same type of buttons for the main window in Vista Workstation:
For displaying tabs to the left of the current tab.
For displaying tabs to the right of the current tab.
For closing the current window.
For minimizing the current window.
For restoring the windows to their previous size.
For closing the current window.
34 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 2 User Interface
Navigating and resizing windows
2.2.10 Status Bar
The status bar is located at the bottom of the main window of Vista Workstation. You can switch it on/off in the View menu, and it contains the following information:
• In the left corner, texts explaining commands on the main menu or the shortcut menus are displayed.
• In the middle, the number of matches in the most recent search result is displayed.
• In the right corner, information about the progress of any dial-up communication is displayed, using icons and text.
Tips
Alternate method of maximizing a window:
• Double-click the title bar of the window to maximize it.
Using the window tabs to navigate between windows:
• Use the arrow keys to browse the window tabs, and then click the tab for the window you want to see.
Using keyboard shortcuts to navigate between windows:
• To go to the next window, press CTRL+F6.
• To go to the previous window, press SHIFT+CTRL+F6
TAC AB, Sept 2007 35 (240)04-00022-02-en
2 User Interface TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
2.3 Using the History ButtonsVista Workstation remembers the order in which windows are opened/selected and the main toolbar has icons for going back and forward through the history of the program.
To go back
• If Back on the main toolbar is green, click Back to go one step back to the previously selected window or graphic.
• If Back is unavailable, then you have reached the beginning of the history of the program.
To go forward
• If Forward on the main toolbar is green, click Forward to go one step forward to the next selected window or graphic.
• If Forward is unavailable, then you have reached the end of the history for of program.
Tips
You can also use the keyboard to go back and forward in the program history.
• To go back, press ALT+LEFT ARROW on your keyboard.
• To go forward, press ALT+RIGHT ARROW on your keyboard.
36 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 2 User Interface
2.4 Drag and Drop in TAC Vista WorkstationDrag and Drop means to select one or more objects/points/folders by holding down the left mouse button and dragging (moving) the mouse pointer to a target and then dropping by releasing the left mouse button.
Drag and drop can be used to move or to copy and paste folders/objects/points.
Caution
• Avoid renaming, moving or deleting objects/shortcuts in the Vista Database that are used/referred to by other objects/short-cuts.
• Before deciding to move, rename or delete an object/shortcut, verify that the object/shortcut does not have any references to other objects that might cause a problem if you move, rename or delete the object/shortcut.
• If you move or rename an object/shortcut included in a graphic, the graphic will not be able to display the value/information from that object/shortcut.
• If you move, rename or delete an object/shortcut used in an online chart, the chart will not able to display the value of the object/shortcut.
• If you move, rename or delete an object/shortcut used in an trend log, the trend log will not able to log the value of the object/shortcut. Any trend log calculation using the trend log will fail. Any trend chart or Report using the trend log or a trend log calculation based on the trend log, will also fail to display/report data.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 37 (240)04-00022-02-en
2 User Interface TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
2.5 Keyboard ShortcutsVista Workstation supports the following keyboard shortcuts:
Press To
CTRL+A Select all rows in a list
CTRL+C Copy
CTRL+INSERT Copy
CTRL+drag item Copy
CTRL+X Cut
SHIFT+DELETE Cut
Drag item Move (cut and paste)
CTRL+SHIFT+V Paste as Shortcut
CTRL+SHIFT+drag item Copy and Paste as Shortcut
DELETE Delete
CTRL+E Edit
CTRL+F Search
CTRL+N New
CTRL+O Open
CTRL+SHIFT+O Open in new window
CTRL+P Print
CTRL+R References
CTRL+S Save my program settings
F1 Opens the Help
F2 Rename
F3 Search
CTRL+F4 Quit window
ALT+F4 Quit Vista Workstation
F5 Refresh
CTRL+F6 Next window
CTRL+SHIFT+F6 Previous window
38 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 2 User Interface
2.6 Alarm Icon on the System TrayThe status area is to be found on the right-hand side of the taskbar in Windows. The taskbar is usually displayed at the bottom of the desktop in Windows.
The status area normally displays the clock and icons for programs run-ning in Windows. Vista Workstation displays an alarm icon in the status area.
Placing the mouse pointer on the alarm icon displays a tool tip contain-ing the name of the computer and the number of unacknowledged alarms in the alarms list.
To activate the alarms list from the alarm icon
• In the status area, double-click the alarm icon.
If Vista Workstation is minimized, the program will open. If the alarms pane is not already displayed, Vista Workstation will display it.
F9 Acknowledge alarm
F11 Full screen mode
SHIFT+F10 Activate shortcut menu
ALT+RIGHT ARROW Forward
ALT+LEFT ARROW Back
Press To
Tip
Alternate method:
• In the status area, right-click the alarm icon, and then click Alarms.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 39 (240)04-00022-02-en
2 User Interface TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
2.7 Customizing the User Interface
2.7.1 Customizing Overview
The user interface of Vista Workstation can be customized to add new menus and toolbars, define shortcut keys, remove/re-arrange the tools menu and so on. To customize the user interface, use the Customize dialog box.
Activate the Customize dialog box, by right-clicking the menu bar and clicking Customize.
The Customize dialog box contains the following tabs:
• Commands. This tab is used for viewing and adding commands to the main menu. You can also add and remove new menus, and select commands from the Commands tab.
• Toolbars. This tab is used for changing and adding toolbars.
• Tools. This tab is used for defining the tools available in the tools menu.
• Keyboard. This tab is used for defining shortcut keys for com-mands in Vista Workstation.
• Menu. This tab is used for the main menu and shortcut menu set-tings.
• Options. This tab is used for displaying/hiding tooltips and/or shortcut key information about the toolbars, and for showing/hid-ing commands on the main menu.
The Reset my usage data button in the Options tab, is used for reset-ting a counter for the most commonly used commands in the menus.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
40 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 2 User Interface
2.7.2 Choosing and Moving Columns in a List
This instruction applies to lists in the following panes and windows:
• The alarms pane and the alarm view windows
• The disabled alarms pane
• The events pane and the event view windows
• The status watch pane
• The search result 1 and search result 2 panes
• The object view window, when displayed as a detailed list.
To choose and move columns in a list
1 Right-click any column header and a dialog box is displayed.
2 In the Select Columns tab choose the columns to display by selecting a the columns and clicking Show or Hide. You can also choose columns by selecting or clearing the check mark before each column.
3 To rearrange the order of the columns in the list, select a column in the list and click Move Up or Move Down.
4 When you have finished choosing and/or rearranging columns, click OK.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 41 (240)04-00022-02-en
2 User Interface TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
Tips
You can also show/hide and move columns directly in the list using the mouse.
To hide columns using the mouse
1 Put the mouse pointer on the right edge of the column header. The mouse pointer should look like a single vertical line with two arrows.
2 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the column edge to edge of the column to the left of it.
3 Release the left mouse button and the column has been removed.
To show columns using the mouse
1 Put the mouse pointer just to the right of the right edge of a col-umn header. If the mouse pointer looks like a double vertical line with two arrows, then there is a hidden column to display.
2 Hold down the left mouse button and drag to the right to display the hidden column.
3 Release the left mouse button and the column will be shown.
To move columns using the mouse
1 Put the mouse pointer on a column header.
2 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the column to its new position in the list.
3 Release the mouse button to drop it on the new position in the list.
42 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 2 User Interface
2.7.3 Creating a New Menu and Adding Commands
To create a new menu and add commands
1 Right-click the menu bar, and then click Customize.
2 In the Customize dialog box, click the Commands tab.
3 In the Categories list, click New Menu.
4 Drag the new menu from the Commands list onto the menu bar in the main window.
5 Add commands new menu by selecting a category in the Categories list and then dragging a command in the Commands list onto the menu you added.
2.7.4 Creating a New Toolbar and Adding Commands
To create a new toolbar and add commands
1 Right-click the menu bar, and then click Customize.
2 In the Customize dialog box, click the Toolbars tab.
3 Click New, type a name for the toolbar and then click OK.
4 Drag the new toolbar onto the menu bar in the main window.
5 Click the Commands tab and add commands to the toolbar by selecting a category in the Categories list and then dragging a command in the Commands list onto the toolbar you added.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 43 (240)04-00022-02-en
2 User Interface TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
2.7.5 Adding a New Command to the Tools Menu
To add a new command to the Tools menu
1 Right-click the menu bar, and then click Customize.
2 In the Customize dialog box, click the Tools tab.
3 Click New (Ins) to insert a new command in the Menu contents list.
4 Type a name for the new command and press ENTER.
5 In the Command box, click the browse button to browse to the program you want to start with the new command.
6 In the Arguments box, type any arguments for the programs such as a file name to open with the selected program and/or parameters for the selected program.
7 In the Initial Directory, type the path to any directory that should be the initial (default) directory (folder) for the program you have selected.
8 Click Close.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
44 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 2 User Interface
2.8 Program Settings for TAC Vista WorkstationCommands for Program Settings
Load My Program Settings. Loads and restores the windows, panes, menus, toolbars and so on in Vista Workstation, in accordance with the user’s most recently saved program settings.
Save My Program Settings. Saves the program settings for the cur-rently logged in Vista User or Windows User, that is the settings for windows, panes, menus, toolbars and so on in Vista Workstation.
Reset Program Settings. Resets the program settings to the default set-tings for Vista Workstation. The default settings only display the folders and the alarms pane. Changes made to the main menu or toolbars are reset to their original setting.
To save my program settings
• On the File menu, click Save My Program Settings.
To load my program settings
• On the File menu, click Load My Program Settings.
To reset program settings
• On the File menu, click Reset Program Settings.
Notes
• The saved program settings only apply to the logged-in user on that particular computer.
• The next time the same user logs in on the same computer, the saved settings will be applied.
• The save settings are also applied when selecting to load pro-gram settings.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 45 (240)04-00022-02-en
2 User Interface TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
46 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 3 Starting or Stopping TAC Vista Server/Workstation
3 Starting or Stopping TAC Vista Server/Workstation
3.1 TAC Vista Server/Workstation OverviewTAC Vista Server
Vista Server is the program that manages the Vista database and com-munication with the devices and other computers in a Vista system.
From version 4.20 of Vista, it is no longer a requirement to run a copy of Vista Server on all the computers in a Vista system. Only computers connected to the devices in the system are required to run Vista Server.
Local Server – If you are running Vista Server and Vista Workstation on the same computer, then Vista Server is referred to as a Local Server.
Remote Server – If Vista Server is running on another computer than the one running Vista Workstation, it is referred to as a Remote Server.
Vista Server can run as a service in Windows.
TAC Vista Workstation
Vista Workstation is used for the day-to-day operation, engineering and administration of the Vista system.
From Vista version 4.20, it is no longer a requirement to run Vista Server and Vista Workstation on the same computer.
When logging in using Vista Workstation, you can choose to log in to a local server or a remote one.
It is also possible to run several copies of Vista Workstation, each copy logged in to a local server or a remote one.
TAC Xenta Server
Xenta Servers pages, such as graphics, trend logs, trend charts and so on, normally viewed with a web browser addressing a Xenta Server can also be viewed in Vista Workstation.
The pages are accessed in the same way as Vista Server objects.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 47 (240)04-00022-02-en
3 Starting or Stopping TAC Vista Server/Workstation TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
3.2 Starting TAC Vista ServerTo start Vista Server
• On the Start menu, point to Programs, point to TAC, point to TAC Vista Server, and then click Server.
Vista Server starts, showing a splash screen. Then Vista Server will be displayed as a minimized program on the taskbar in Windows.
3.3 Stopping TAC Vista ServerTo stop TAC Vista Server
1 On the File menu, click Exit.
2 In the dialog box that will be displayed, click Yes to confirm that you want to quit the program.
3.4 Starting TAC Vista WorkstationTo start TAC Vista Workstation
• On the Start menu, point to Programs, point to TAC, and then click TAC Vista Workstation.
Vista Workstation starts, showing a splash screen. Then the login dialog box for Vista Workstation is displayed.
3.5 Stopping TAC Vista WorkstationTo stop TAC Vista Workstation
• On the File menu, click Exit.
48 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 4 Logging in and Logging out
4 Logging in and Logging out
4.1 Logging in, Logging out and Standby ModeLogging in
When you start Vista Workstation, you are required to log in using a user name and a password in order to confirm your identity as a valid user. When you log in, you actually log in to Vista Server in order to be granted access to the data provided by a Vista Server. The user you are using in Vista Workstation grants you access to some or all of the func-tionality of the programs, depending on the authority level of your user.
Logging out
When you log out, you confirm that you do not wish to have access to Vista Workstation or data from a Vista Server.
Local or remote Vista Server
Vista Server is referred to as a Local Vista Server when running on the same computer that you are running Vista Workstation on. If Vista Server is running on another computer, then Vista Server is referred to as a Remote Vista Server.
Vista User
This refers to using Vista User created in Vista. By default, there are four accounts available; User, Field, Manager and System. The admin-istrators of the Vista system can create Vista accounts for the users of Vista.
Windows User
This refers to the user account that you use when logging into Windows. That user account can be part of one or more user groups in Windows. A Windows User in Vista is an object in the Vista database referring to a user account or a user group in Windows. This enables logging into Vista using a user from Windows.
The currently logged in Windows User refers to the user account you used when logging in to Windows on your computer.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 49 (240)04-00022-02-en
4 Logging in and Logging out TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
Standby Mode
In Standby mode, Vista Workstation data is dynamically displayed in graphics, online charts and so on, but the program is locked as regards input. There are only two buttons available to the user, Log in and Log Out. The user/operator is required to log in again to be able to have any effect on the program.
Standby Mode can be activated manually, by the user, or automatically by Vista Workstation when the user has been inactive for a few minutes. Automatic standby must be activated by the administrator, individually for each user.
4.2 Logging in as a Vista User
4.2.1 Logging in to a Local Vista Server (Vista User)
To log in to a local Vista Server
1 In the Log in to Vista Server dialog box, click Options to display other options than user name and password.
2 In the Vista Server to log in to list, click [Local Server].
3 In the User type list, click Vista User.
4 In the User name text box, type your user name.
5 In the Password text box, type your password.
6 Click OK.
50 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 4 Logging in and Logging out
4.2.2 Logging in to a Remote Vista Server (Vista User)
To log in to a remote Vista Server
1 In the Log in to Vista Server dialog box, click Options to display other options than User name and Password.
2 In the Vista Server to log in to list, enter the name of the remote server.
3 In the User type list, click Vista User.
4 In the User name text box, type your user name.
5 In the Password text box, type your password.
6 Click OK.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 51 (240)04-00022-02-en
4 Logging in and Logging out TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
4.2.3 Changing Your Password (Vista User)
To change your password (Vista User)
1 In Vista Workstation, on the File menu, click Change Password.
2 In the Old Password box, type the password currently in use.
3 In the New Password box, type the new password.
4 In the Confirm Password box, re-type the new password.
5 Click OK.
Note
• The minimum number of characters in a password is 4, and the maximum is 255.
52 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 4 Logging in and Logging out
4.3 Logging in as a Windows User
4.3.1 Logging in to a Local Vista Server (Currently Logged-in Windows User)
To log in to a local Vista Server (currently logged-in Windows user)
1 In the Log in to TAC Vista Server dialog box, click Options to display other options than User name and Password.
2 In the Vista Server to log in to box, click [Local Server].
3 In the User type box, click Currently logged-in Windows user.
4 Click OK.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 53 (240)04-00022-02-en
4 Logging in and Logging out TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
4.3.2 Logging in to a Remote Vista Server (Currently Logged-in Windows User)
To log in to a remote Vista Server (currently logged-in Windows user)
1 In the Log in to Vista Server dialog box, click Options to display other options than User name and Password.
2 In the Vista Server to log in to box, enter the name of the remote server.
3 In the User type box, click Currently logged-in Windows user.
4 Click OK.
54 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 4 Logging in and Logging out
4.3.3 Logging in to a Remote Vista Server (Windows User)
To log in to a local Vista Server
1 In the Login to TAC Vista Server dialog box, click Options to display other options than User name and Password.
2 In the Vista Server to log in to box, enter the name of the remote server.
3 In the User type box, click Windows User.
4 In the User name text box, type your user name.
5 In the Password text box, type your password.
6 Click OK.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 55 (240)04-00022-02-en
4 Logging in and Logging out TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
4.4 Logging OutTo log out from TAC Vista Workstation
• On the File menu, click Log out.
4.5 Activating Standby ModeTo activate the standby mode
• On the File menu, click Standby Mode.
4.6 Change ModeThe change mode list changes the mode of Vista between Engineering mode (offline) and Operating mode (online).
The mode is indicated on the program icon in the Windows taskbar.
• Engineering Mode
• Operating Mode
Notes
• In a Vista network with several Workstations and one or several Servers, the selection Engineering/Operating mode is now (Vista 4.3.1) done per Vista Workstation and not, as previously, globally for the network. This means that setting one Workstation in Engi-neering mode will not force the others to leave the Operating mode.
• If you exit Vista Workstation in Engineering mode and if you start Vista Workstation again, you will be prompted with “The client is set to Engineering mode. Change to Operating mode?”.
56 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
5 Alarms
5.1 Alarms OverviewWhat is an Alarm?
In Vista, alarms are handled by alarm event objects that monitor other objects, for example fans or temperatures. When certain criteria relating to the monitored object are met, the alarm will be tripped and the alarm event object will change state from Normal to Alarm.
How to Notice if an Alarm has been Tripped
When an alarm is tripped, it will be displayed as an unacknowledged alarm in the alarms list. If the alarm buzzer has been activated, a sound will also be heard.
If the alarm pane is not being displayed when an alarm is tripped, it will automatically open to display the new alarm in the alarms list.
What to do when an Alarm has been Tripped
If your task is merely supervising the system and you are not allowed to acknowledge alarms, follow your employer’s instructions as regards how to act when an alarm is tripped.
If your task is acknowledging alarms, always investigate their cause and take the necessary action to deal with them before acknowledging, dis-abling or resetting them.
In Vista Workstation, the following actions are possible:
• Acknowledge alarms.
• Disable alarms.
• Interlock alarms.
• Filter the alarms list
• View events for an alarm.
• Open linked objects.
• Print the alarms list.
• View the properties of an Alarm
In some cases, it is also possible to start an online chart and to create a trend log.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 57 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
Purge Alarms
You can purge an alarm in the alarms list, that is remove the alarm from the Vista alarm database. The alarm event in the Vista event database will remain.
5.1.1 Opening the Alarms Pane
To open the alarms pane
• On the View menu, click Alarms.
Tips
Alternate methods:
• On the main tool bar, click Alarms.
• On the Windows taskbar, in the status area, double-click the alarm icon.
• On the Windows taskbar, in the status area, right-click the alarm icon and then click Alarms.
58 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
5.1.2 Alarm States in the Alarms List
The color settings for the alarm states affect all computers in a Vista sys-tem. These are the default color settings for the different alarm states in Vista:
The following alarm states are available in the alarms list:
• Unacknowledged alarms. When an alarm is tripped, it will appear as an unacknowledged tripped alarm in the alarms list. If the alarm is reset before it has been acknowledged, this will be indicated by a (dash) at the beginning of the row in the alarms list. The row will however keep its color setting.
• Acknowledged alarms. If the alarm is acknowledged, it will change state to an acknowledged tripped alarm in the alarms list. A (check mark) at the beginning of the row also indicates that the row has been acknowledged. If an acknowledged alarm is reset, it will disappear from the alarms list.
• Reset alarm require acknowledgement. This alarm state indi-cates that, even though the alarm has been reset, you are required to acknowledge the alarm in the alarms list. This alarm state will only be available if the administrator has activated it in the $System object.
• Manually disabled alarms. This alarm state indicates that the alarm has been manually disabled, and disabled alarms are dis-played in the disabled alarms list.
• Interlocked alarms. This alarm state indicates that the alarm has been interlocked, and interlocked alarms are displayed in the dis-abled alarms list.
Unacknowledged alarms Text color: Black. Background color: Red
Acknowledged alarms Text color: Black. Background color: Green
Reset alarm require acknowledgement Text color: Black. Background color: Yellow
Manually disabled alarms Text color: Black. Background color: White
Interlocked alarms Text color: Black. Background color: Gray
TAC AB, Sept 2007 59 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
5.1.3 Updating the Alarms List
To update the alarms list
1 Click the title bar of the alarms pane to make it the active pane in Vista Workstation.
2 Press F5 to update the alarms list.
5.1.4 Resizing Columns in the Alarms List
To resize columns in the alarms list
• In the alarms pane, right-click the alarms list and then click Resize Columns.
The columns will be resized to the maximum length of the content of each columns.
5.1.5 Acknowledging Alarms
To acknowledge alarms
1 In the alarms list, select one or more unacknowledged alarms.
2 Right-click the alarm(s) and then click Acknowledge.
Tip
• Alternate method:
• Right-click the alarms list and then click Refresh.
Note
• Before acknowledging an alarm, always investigate its cause and take the appropriate action.
60 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
The alarms will be acknowledged one by one, and the alarms list updated.
Tips
Alternate methods:
• To acknowledge an alarm in the alarms list, double-click the unacknowledged alarm.
• In the alarms list, select one or more unacknowledged alarms. Press F9 to acknowledge the selected alarms.
• In the alarms list, select one or more unacknowledged alarms. On the alarms list toolbar, click Acknowledge.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 61 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
To acknowledge alarms using enforced acknowledge response
1 In the alarms list, select one or more unacknowledged alarms.
2 Right-click the alarm(s) and then click Acknowledge.
For each alarm, the Enforced Acknowledge Response dialog box is displayed.
3 In the Cause list, click a pre-defined cause.
4 In the Action list, click a pre-defined action.
5 In the Comment box, type an optional comment, and then click OK.
The alarms will be acknowledged one by one, and the alarms list updated.
Note
• If enforced acknowledge response has been activated, the opera-tor will be forced to select a cause, an action and type a com-ment, for each alarm he/she acknowledges.
62 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
5.1.6 Opening Linked Objects
To open a linked object
• In the alarms list, right-click the desired alarm, point to Linked Objects and then click the linked object you want to open.
Tips
Alternate methods:
• In the alarms list, click an alarm displaying the text “[Click to Open]” in the Linked Objects column. Click the linked object you wish to open.
• In the alarms list, select an alarm displaying the text “[Click to Open]” in the Linked Objects column. On the alarms list toolbar, click one of the icons to open a linked object.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 63 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
5.1.7 Viewing Events for an Alarm
To view events for an alarm
• In the alarms list, select an alarm, right-click and then click View Events.
A window will open with a filter activated which only displays alarm events related to the alarm you selected.
To save a temporary event view as an event view object
1 Right-click the events list, and then click Save as Event View.
2 Select where to save the event view in the Vista database.
3 In the Object name box, type a name for the event view object, and then click Save.
The event view will be saved as an event view object in the database.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
64 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
5.1.8 Viewing the Signal Tripping the Alarm
To view the signal tripping the alarm
• In the alarms list, select an alarm, right-click and then click Signal Properties.
5.1.9 Filtering the Alarms List
Normally, the alarms list displays all alarms, but it can be filtered to dis-play a subset of the alarms.
The alarms list can be filtered using one or more of the following options:
• Description
• Object ID
• Alarm text
• User
• Alarm priorities
• Alarm count
• Date and Time
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Important
• Does not apply to Xenta alarms.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 65 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
To customize a filter for the alarms list
1 Right-click a row in the alarms list, and then click Filter.
2 In the Filter dialog box, select one or more of the possible filter options.
3 Click OK
The filter will be activated and the alarms list updated.
To delete an active filter and display all the alarms
• Right-click a row in the alarms list, click All Alarms.
The alarms list will be updated, displaying all alarms.
Tips
Alternate method:
• On the alarms list toolbar, click Filter.
• For more information on the filter options, click Help in the $AlarmView dialog box.
66 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
5.1.10 Disabling Alarms
To disable alarms
1 In the alarms list, select one or more unacknowledged alarms.
2 Right-click the alarms list and then click Disable.
The alarm will change state to manually disabled and also appear in the disabled alarm list, in the disabled alarms pane.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• Before disabling an alarm, always investigate its cause and take the appropriate action.
Tips
Alternate method:
• In the alarms list, select one or more alarms.
• On the alarms list toolbar, click Disable.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 67 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
5.1.11 Interlocking an Alarm
Vista supports both logical and time-based interlocking of an alarm. Logical interlocking is controlled by a binary point, and, as long as the binary point is ON, the interlock will remain active.
Time-based interlocking is controlled by a manually set timer and is used to set a minimum time between two consecutive alarms. This is a way of preventing repeat alarms being generated when a fault occurs and is reset several times during a short period.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• Interlocking must NOT be used for dial-up devices. It is not pos-sible to check interlocking in a dial-up device during an alarm as the line is being used by the device sending the alarm.
68 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
To activate logical interlocking
1 In the alarms list, select an alarm.
2 Right-click in the alarms list, and then click Alarm Properties.
3 In the General tab, click Interlock.
4 In the Logical text box, browse to the binary point you intend to use to control the interlock.
5 Click Select.
6 Click OK.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 69 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
To activate time-based interlocking
1 In the alarms list, right-click an alarm in the alarms list, and then click Alarm Properties.
2 In the General tab, click Interlock.
3 In the Disabled for box, set the number of hours and/or minutes you want the alarm to be interlocked.
4 Click OK.
70 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
5.1.12 Purging an Alarm
To purge an alarm
1 In the alarms list, select one or more alarms.
2 Right-click the alarms list and then click Purge.
3 Click Yes or Yes to All to confirm purge.
The alarm(s) will be purged.
5.1.13 Printing the Alarms List
To print the alarms list
1 In the alarms list, right-click and then click Print.
2 The Windows Print dialog box will be displayed. Select a printer and then click OK.
The number and width of the columns will be printed as they are dis-played on the screen.To customize the number and width of the col-umns, see Chapter 5.1.18, “Selecting Columns in the Alarms List”, on page 75.
If you have activated a filter which reduces the types of alarms dis-played or which only shows alarms for a specific object, then only the alarms matching the criteria for the filter you have activated will appear in the printed list.
The paper size and orientation (portrait or landscape) are defined in the properties of the Windows Print dialog box.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Notes
• Before purging an alarm, always investigate its cause and take the appropriate action.
• The possibility to purge alarms is restricted by access rights.
Tip
Alternate method:
1 In the alarms list, select one or more alarms.
2 On the alarm list toolbar, click Purge.
3 Click Yes or Yes to All to confirm purge.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 71 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
5.1.14 Creating an Online Chart
To create an online chart
1 In the alarms list, right-click an alarm and click Start Online Chart.
2 In the online chart, right-click and then click Save.
3 In the dialog box, type a file name in the File name text box and then click Save.
For more information see Chapter 5, “Alarms”, on page 57.
5.1.15 Creating a Trend Log
To create a trend log
1 In the alarms list, right-click an alarm, point to Create Trend Log and then click either Vista Server Trend Log or Xenta Trend Log.
2 In the Trend Log Wizard, select a suitable trend log profile and then click Finish.
For more information see Chapter 16, “Trend Logging”, on page 159.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• This functionality is only available to alarms referring to an object/value displayable in an online chart.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• This functionality is only available to alarms referring to an object/value that can be logged in a trend log.
72 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
5.1.16 Viewing a Trend Chart for an Alarm
To view a Trend Chart from the Alarms pane
• In the alarms list, right-click an alarm, point to View Trend and then click the trend chart you wish to view.
A window opens displaying the trend chart you selected.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• This functionality is only available to alarms referring to an object/value that has been logged in a trend log, and the trend log is, directly or indirectly, included in one or several trend charts. Trend charts includes logged values from trend logs or trend log calculations.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 73 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
5.1.17 Selecting Colors for the Alarms List
The colors used for the alarms (rows) in the alarms list reflect the alarm states. The alarms are grouped according to the alarm states, with each alarm state having its own color setting, for both text color and back-ground color.
It is also possible to select which font to use or to disable the color set-ting. The color setting is a global setting for the Vista system, that is all computers in a Vista system will be affected by it.
To select colors for alarms
1 In the alarms pane, right-click the alarms list and then click Customize.
2 In the Alarm Customization dialog box, click the Text tab.
3 Select the colors for the alarm states (font color and background color), and then click OK.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Tip
Alternate method:
• Right-click the header of a column in the alarms list to activate the Alarm Customization dialog box.
74 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
5.1.18 Selecting Columns in the Alarms List
To select columns in the alarms list
1 In the alarms pane, right-click the alarms list and then click Customize.
2 Click the Select Column(s) the tab.
3 Select the columns to be displayed and then click OK.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Tip
Alternate method:
• Right-click the header of a column in the alarms list to activate the Alarm Customization dialog box.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 75 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
5.2 Disabling Alarms
5.2.1 Opening the Disabled Alarms Pane
To open the disabled alarms pane
• On the View menu, click Disabled Alarms.
Tip
Alternate method:
• On the main toolbar, click Disabled Alarms.
76 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
5.2.2 Alarm States in the Disabled Alarms List
The color settings of the alarm states affect all computers in a Vista sys-tem. These are the default color settings for the different alarm states in Vista:
The following alarm states are available in the disabled alarms list:
• Manually disabled events. This alarm state indicates that the alarm has been manually disabled, and disabled alarms are dis-played in the disabled alarms list.
• Interlocked events. This alarm state indicates that the alarm has been interlocked, and interlocked alarms are displayed in the dis-abled alarms list.
Manually disabled alarm events Text color: Black. Background color: White
Interlocked alarm events Text color: Black. Background color: Gray
TAC AB, Sept 2007 77 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
5.2.3 Resizing Columns in the Disabled Alarms List
To resize columns in the disabled alarms list
• In the disabled alarms pane, right-click the disabled alarms list and then click Resize Columns.
The columns will be resized to the maximum length of the contents of each columns.
78 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
5.2.4 Enabling Disabled Alarms
To enable alarms
1 In the disabled alarms list, select one or more disabled alarms.
2 Right-click the disabled alarms list and then click Enable.
The disabled alarm is removed from the disabled alarms pane, and the alarm changes color in the alarms pane.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Tip
Alternate method:
1 In the disabled alarms list, select one or more alarms.
2 On the disabled alarms list toolbar, click Enable.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 79 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
5.2.5 Removing Interlock for an Alarm
To remove interlock
1 In the alarms list, select an alarm.
2 Right-click in the alarms list, and then click Alarm Properties.
3 In the General tab, select the Not disabled option.
4 Click OK.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
80 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
5.2.6 Printing the Disabled Alarms List
To print the disabled alarms list
1 In the disabled alarms list, right-click and then click Print.
2 The Windows Print dialog box will be displayed. Select a printer and then click OK.
The columns displayed and their width will be in accordance with the settings of the disabled alarms list.
If you have activated a filter which reduces the types of alarms dis-played or which only shows alarms for a specific object, then only the alarms matching the criteria for the filter you have activated will be dis-played in the printed list.
The paper size and orientation (portrait or landscape) are defined in the properties of the Windows Print dialog box.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 81 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
5.2.7 Viewing Events for a Disabled Alarm
To view events for a disabled alarm
• In the alarms list, select a disabled alarm, right-click and then click View Events.
A window opens, with a filter activated which only displays alarm events related to the disabled alarm you selected.
To save the event view
1 Right-click the events list, and then click Save as Event View.
2 Select where to save the event view in the Vista database.
3 In the File name text box, type a name for the event view, and then click Save.
The event view will be saved as an event view object in the database.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
82 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
5.2.8 Selecting Colors for the Disabled Alarms List
The colors used for the alarms (rows) in the disabled alarms list reflect the alarm states. The alarms are grouped according to the alarm states, with each alarm states having its own color setting, for both text color and background color.
It is also possible to select which font to use or to disable the color set-ting. The color setting is a global setting for the Vista system, that is all computers in a Vista system will be affected by the setting.
To select colors for alarms
1 In the disabled alarms pane, right-click the disabled alarms list and then click Customize.
2 Click the Text tab.
3 Select the colors for the alarm states (font color and background color), and then click OK.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 83 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
5.2.9 Selecting Columns in the Disabled Alarms List
To select columns in the disabled alarms list
1 In the disabled alarms pane, right-click the disabled alarms list and then click Customize.
2 Click the Select Column(s) tab.
3 Select the columns to be display and then click OK.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Tip
• Alternate method:
• Right-click the header of a column in the disabled alarms list to activate the Customization of Disabled Alarms dialog box.
84 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 6 Graphics
6 Graphics
6.1 Graphics OverviewGraphics are used to navigate a site and display information about the buildings, floors, systems and subsystems of the site. Graphics display-ing systems or subsystems usually describe the process of the system using special symbols for fans, valves, temperature sensors and so on. Graphics usually also contain texts and values from the site.
When working in Operating mode in TAC Workstation, the symbols, texts or values in the graphics are dynamically updated with data from the site. Symbols may change shape or color, or start to flash to indicate that something is wrong, or that an alarm has been tripped.
Graphics can be linked together making it possible to navigate between graphics, from overview graphics, to graphics displaying information about a building, floor, room or system. When you click a link, you will move to another graphic.
6.2 Navigate GraphicsNavigation between graphics is achieved using link areas in the graphic which point to other graphics.
Tips
• If the mouse pointer passes over a link, the pointer will change to a pointing hand and a tooltip will display the Vista path to the linked graphic.
• When navigating graphics, you can also use the and icons on the main toolbar to go back and forward in the program his-tory, displaying the previous or next graphic or window.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 85 (240)04-00022-02-en
6 Graphics TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
To open a linked graphic
1 In an open graphic, click the arrow icon on the toolbar.
2 Point to a link area in the graphic and then click the left mouse button.
The linked graphic will be displayed in the current window.
86 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 6 Graphics
To open a linked graphic in a new window
1 In an open graphic, click the arrow icon on the toolbar.
2 Point to a link area in the graphic, hold down the SHIFT key and then click the left mouse button.
3 The linked graphic will be displayed in a new window.
.
Tips
Alternate methods:
• To open a linked graphic, place the mouse pointer over the link, right-click and then click Open in the shortcut menu.
• To open a linked graphic in a new window, SHIFT-click the link.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 87 (240)04-00022-02-en
6 Graphics TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
6.3 Searching for GraphicsTo search for graphics
1 In the search window, click the browse button for the Type of devices or objects box.
Open the Files branch and select Graphic – TGML and then click OK.
88 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 6 Graphics
2 In the Look in box, click the browse button, select a folder to search and then click OK. If you wish to search subunits, select the Include subunits option. If you want to limit the search to the first 1,000 items, select the Interrupt search if more than 1000 results option.
3 Click Search Now and view the result in Search Result 1.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 89 (240)04-00022-02-en
6 Graphics TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
6.4 Opening a GraphicNormally graphics are displayed in the same window. You can choose to open graphics (and other objects) in new windows, making it possible to see several graphics at the same time.
To open a graphic
1 In the folders pane, browse to the graphic you want to open.
2 In the object view, double-click the graphic to open it.
Tip
• To manually update the information in an open graphic, press the F5 key on your keyboard.
Tip
Alternate method:
• To open a linked graphic, place the mouse pointer over the link, right-click and then click Open in the shortcut menu.
90 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 6 Graphics
To open a graphic in a new window
1 In the folders pane, browse to the graphic you want to open
2 In the object view, right-click the graphic and click Open in New Window.
Tip
Alternate method:
• In the folders pane or in the object view, drag the graphic to the workspace (background) of Vista Workstation.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 91 (240)04-00022-02-en
6 Graphics TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
6.5 Changing a Value in a Graphic
If you have the required level of authority, you will be allowed to change a value in a graphic.
To change a value in a graphic
1 In an open graphic, click the arrow icon on the toolbar.
2 Point to the value you want to change in the graphic, and then click the value.
3 In the dialog box that appears, type a new value and click OK.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Tip
• If the mouse pointer passes over a value, the pointer will change to a pointing hand and a light yellow tooltip will dis-play the name and path of object.
92 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 6 Graphics
6.6 Viewing Events for a Value in a Graphic
To view events for a value in a graphic
• In an open graphic, right-click to the value and then click View Events.
A window will open with a filter activated which only displays events related to the object you selected.
To save a temporary event view as an event view object
1 Right-click the events list, and then click Save as Event View.
2 Select where to save the event view in the Vista database.
3 In the Object name text box, type a name for the event view object, and then click Save.
The event view will be saved as an event view object in the database.
6.7 Creating an Online Chart for a Value in a Graphic
To create an online chart for a value in a graphic
1 In an open graphic, right-click on a value, point to Start Online Chart and then click the value to plot.
2 In the online chart, right-click and then click Save as online chart.
3 In the Object name box type a object name.
4 Click Save.
For more information see Chapter 5, “Alarms”, on page 57.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 93 (240)04-00022-02-en
6 Graphics TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
6.8 Viewing a Trend Chart for a Value in a Graphic
To view a trend chart for a value in a graphic
• In an open graphic, right-click a value and point to View Trend and then click the trend chart you wish to view.
A window opens displaying the trend chart you selected.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• This functionality is only available to an object/value that has been logged in a trend log, and the trend log is, directly or indi-rectly, included in one or several trend charts. Trend charts includes logged values from trend logs or trend log calculations.
94 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 6 Graphics
6.9 Zooming in and out of a GraphicTo zoom in
1 Ensure that the default cursor is selected.
2 Right-click an open graphic and then click Zoom In, on the short-cut menu.
3 Place the mouse pointer over the graphic. Hold down the left mouse button and draw an area to zoom in on.
To zoom out
1 Ensure that the default cursor is selected.
2 Right-click an open graphic and then click Zoom Out, on the shortcut menu.
3 Place the mouse pointer over the graphic. Click the left mouse button to zoom out.
Tip
Alternate method:
• Hold down the CTRL key and roll the mouse wheel. Roll up to zoom in and roll down to zoom out.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 95 (240)04-00022-02-en
6 Graphics TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
6.10 Scrolling a GraphicYou will only be able to scroll a graphic, if you have zoomed in to look at a graphic in detail, or if the graphic is not being displayed in Zoom to fit mode. Scrolling means moving around in a graphic in order to see another part of it.
To scroll a graphic
1 Ensure that the default cursor is selected.
2 Right-click an open graphic and then click Scroll on the shortcut menu. The mouse pointer changes to a .
3 Place the mouse pointer over the graphic. Press down the left mouse button to grab the graphic and move the mouse to scroll the graphic.
Tips
Alternate methods:
• You can use the arrow keys and the Page Up/Page Down keys on your keyboard.
• You can place the mouse pointer anywhere in the graphic, which is not a link or an object, and hold down the left mouse button, to scroll the graphic.
96 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 6 Graphics
6.11 Opening an Attached Notes ObjectNotes are objects that normally are simple text files, but can also be other types of files. Notes is opened by the program associated to that type of file in Windows.
To open an attached notes
1 In a graphic, right-click and the click View Notes.
2 View the notes and add additional information if necessary.
Important
• This function is only available for graphics of the OGC format.
• In graphics of the TGML format, notes is opened using links/but-tons in the graphic.
Tip
Alternate method:
• On the graphics toolbar, click View Notes.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 97 (240)04-00022-02-en
6 Graphics TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
6.12 Printing a Graphic
To print a graphic
1 Ensure that the default cursor is selected.
2 Right-click an open graphic and then click Print.
3 The Windows Print dialog box of will be displayed. Select a printer and then click OK.
The paper size and orientation (portrait or landscape) are defined in the properties of the Windows Print dialog box.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
98 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 7 Notes
7 Notes
7.1 Notes OverviewA Notes object in Vista is normally a text file. Notes objects can, how-ever, be manually defined in Vista as another type of file, for example an Adobe Acrobat (.pdf) file, or a Word file (.doc).
When creating or opening notes object, a copy of the file is opened by the tool/program in Windows that is associated with that type of file. Normally, Microsoft Notepad is the associated program for text files (.txt).
It is possible to change the setting in Windows to associate *.txt files with another program, if required. See the Help or other documentation for Windows for information about this.
If any changes are made, you must first save them in the program used to display/change notes. Vista will then also ask you if you wish to save the changed file in the Vista database.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 99 (240)04-00022-02-en
7 Notes TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
7.2 Opening a Notes ObjectTo open a notes object
1 In the folders pane, browse to the folder containing the notes object you want to open.
2 In the object view, double-click the notes object to open it.
The notes object are opened by the tool/program in Windows that is associated with that type of file.
Normally Microsoft Notepad is the associated program for text files (.txt).
Note
• Notes can be opened from a graphic if a graphical object in the graphic and corresponding link for the notes object has been defined in the graphics editor. Notes can also be linked to an alarm and opened from the alarms list.
100 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 7 Notes
7.3 Editing a Notes ObjectTo edit a notes object
1 Open the notes object.
2 Edit the file in the program used to edit the file.
3 Save the file and quit the program.
After the program used to modify the file is closed, a dialog box in Vista Workstation will ask you to save the notes object.
4 Click Yes to save the notes in Vista Workstation.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 101 (240)04-00022-02-en
7 Notes TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
7.4 Printing a Notes Object
To print a notes object in Microsoft Notepad
1 On the File menu, click Print.
2 The Windows Print dialog box will be displayed. Select a printer and then click OK to print the notes.
Note
• This information concerns how to print a text file using Notepad in Windows. For further details, see the Windows Help or Microsoft Notepad.
102 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 8 Hyperlink
8 Hyperlink
8.1 Hyperlink OverviewWeb sites can be opened in Vista Workstation and Vista Webstation by the use of hyperlink objects.
8.2 Opening a Hyperlink ObjectTo open a hyperlink object
1 In the folders pane, click the folder containing the hyperlink object you want to open.
2 In the object view, double-click the hyperlink object to open it.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 103 (240)04-00022-02-en
8 Hyperlink TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
104 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 9 Trend Charts
9 Trend Charts
9.1 Trend Charts Overview
Trend charts graphically display the logged values from one or more trend logs. Trend charts can support the display of values using both a primary and a secondary y-axis.
To update the value for a trend chart, you must manually update the chart, right-click the chart and then click Refresh, or press the F5 key on the keyboard. This will force the chart to read the trend log values again.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• If you update a trend chart for a Vista system that uses dial-up communication, this may force the system to dial-up in order to retrieve the logged values.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 105 (240)04-00022-02-en
9 Trend Charts TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
9.2 Creating a Trend Chart
To create a trend chart
1 In the object view, make sure that no object is selected.
2 Right-click in the object view and point to New, then point to Object and then click Chart – Trend.
3 Type a name for the new trend chart and press ENTER.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• It is now necessary to add trend logs to the trend chart and make any necessary configurations.
106 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 9 Trend Charts
9.3 Opening a Trend Chart
To open a trend chart
1 In the folders pane, browse to the folder containing the trend chart object you want to open.
2 In the object view, double-click the trend chart to open it.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• If you open a trend chart that does not contain any trend logs the warning message “No trend log series in chart” appears. This is normal if you just created the trend chart and have not yet added any trend logs to the chart.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 107 (240)04-00022-02-en
9 Trend Charts TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
9.4 Adding Trend logs to an Open Trend Chart
To add trend logs to an open trend chart
1 On the Windows menu, click Cascade.
2 In the object view, select one or more trend logs and drag it/them to the trend chart.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
108 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 9 Trend Charts
Note
• If you drop the value into the left side of the chart, the value will be displayed using the primary y-axis. If you drop the value on the right side of the chart the value will be displayed using the secondary y-axis.
Tips
Alternate methods:
• In a open trend chart, right-click and then click Edit Trend Chart. In the dialog box displayed, click the Trend Log tab. Click Add to add a trend log.
• In an open trend chart, right-click and then click Insert Trend Log. In the Select dialog box, find and select a trend log and then click Select.
• In the object view, right-click the trend chart and then click Properties. In the dialog box displayed, click the Trend Log tab. Click Add to add a value.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 109 (240)04-00022-02-en
9 Trend Charts TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
9.5 Editing a Trend Chart
To edit a trend chart
1 In the folders pane, browse to the folder containing the trend chart object you want to edit.
2 In the object view, right-click the trend chart and then click Properties.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Tip
Alternate method:
• When a trend chart is open, click Edit Trend Chart on the Trend Chart menu.
110 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 9 Trend Charts
9.6 Viewing a Trend Chart
A trend chart can be displayed by double-clicking on the trend chart in the object view.
Trend charts can also be displayed from the alarms list, the status watch pane, a search result pane or a graphic. Simply right-click the object/value, point to View Trend and click the trend chart you wish to view.
You can right-click a point/object or a trend log and find out if the selected object is included in any trend chart, and then select to display the trend chart.
To view a trend chart from the object view
1 In the folders pane, browse to the folder containing the object you are interested in.
2 In the object view, right-click the object, point to View Trend and then click the trend chart you wish to view.
To view a trend chart from the alarms pane or an alarms view
• In the alarms pane or alarms view, right-click the alarm, point to View Trend and then click the trend chart you wish to view.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 111 (240)04-00022-02-en
9 Trend Charts TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
To view a trend chart from a search result pane
• In the search result pane, right-click the object, point to View Trend and then click the trend chart you wish to view.
To view a trend chart from the status watch pane
• In the status watch pane, right-click the object, point to View Trend and then click the trend chart you wish to view.
112 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 9 Trend Charts
To view a trend chart from a graphic
• In an open graphic, right-click a value and point to View Trend and then click the trend chart you wish to view.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 113 (240)04-00022-02-en
9 Trend Charts TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
9.7 Deleting a Trend Chart
To delete a trend chart
1 In the object view, right-click the trend chart you want to delete and then click Delete.
2 In the dialog box displayed, click Yes to confirm.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
114 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 9 Trend Charts
9.8 Printing a Trend Chart
To print a trend chart
1 Right-click an open trend chart, and click Print.
2 The Windows Print dialog box is displayed. Select a printer and click OK.
The paper size and orientation (portrait or landscape) are defined in the properties of the Windows Print dialog box.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 115 (240)04-00022-02-en
9 Trend Charts TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
9.9 Viewing Events from Trend ChartTo view events from a Trend Chart
1 Open the trend chart you want to view.
2 Right-click the trend chart area and click View Log Events.
116 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 9 Trend Charts
9.10 Viewing Estimated and Edited ValuesIf the communication between the logging point and the Vista Server is interrupted so that no values can be transferred, the values are esti-mated.
The estimated values are marked estimated in the view log dialog box and they are always the same as the last logged value.
Estimated values can be modified if they differs considerably from the actual values. (See Section 16.11, “Editing Trend Log Values”, on page 175.)
To view estimated and modified values in a trend chart
1 Open the trend chart.
2 Right-click and click Indicate Edited Values or Indicate Esti-mated Values.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 117 (240)04-00022-02-en
9 Trend Charts TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
The estimated and modified values are shown in the trend chart.
The icons in the chart indicate:
Estimated values.
Edited values.
Tip
Alternate method:
• Click the Indicate Edited Values or Indicate Estimated Values symbols in the trend chart tool bar.
118 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 9 Trend Charts
9.11 Viewing an I/NET Trend Chart
You can view I/NET trend charts that are part of the project loaded in the Xenta 527, or you can browse to an I/NET point that has a trend sampling extension and view its trend chart.
An I/NET point must already have a trend sampling extension in order for it to provide a trend chart. If you need to add a trend sampling extension to an I/NET point, refer to Section 16.13.1, “Adding/opening an I/NET Trend Sample”, on page 178 for instructions.
To view an I/NET trend chart
1 In the folder pane, expand the Xenta 527 server and locate the I/NET object.
This object is a container for I/NET points, point extensions, and configuration objects.
2 Expand the I/NET object and its underlying branches until the point type portion of the desired I/NET point is visible.
The following example shows I/NET point 55220004 DO selected in the folder pane.
3 Expand the point type portion of the I/NET point to view its avail-able HTML pages.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 119 (240)04-00022-02-en
9 Trend Charts TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
4 Click on the Trend Configuration page to view the point’s trend setup.
If necessary, you can adjust the trend setup. Refer to your I/NET Seven documentation for a detailed description of each parameter.
5 Click Graph to view the point’s trend chart.
120 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 10 Reports
10 Reports
10.1 Reports Overview
10.1.1 Reports
Reports are created using the report generator for Vista, which is an pro-gram that uses Microsoft Excel. Reports are normally saved in the Vista database as report objects.
Reports can be saved outside of the Vista database.
Reports can be run automatically using a Periodical Report object and a Time Event object to determine how often to run them.
10.1.2 Report Copies
Report copies are located in the Archive subfolder at the same location in the Vista database as the report. The Archive subfolder will have a subfolder named identical to the report were the report copies are placed.
The report copies are named according to the date and time they were saved, using the syntax <YYMMDD_hhmmss>, for example 050303_120005.
Example:
A report DatRep was opened on the 5th of May 2005 at 10:13:13 and saved as a copy. The a report copy is saved as 050505_101313 in the subfolder DatRep in the subfolder Archive.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 121 (240)04-00022-02-en
10 Reports TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
10.2 Opening a Report
To open a report
1 In the folders pane, browse to the report you want to open.
2 In the object view, double-click the report to open it.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Tip
Alternate methods:
• In the object view, right-click the report and click Open.
Note
• Reports can be opened from a graphic if it has been linked using a command point in the graphic. Reports can also be linked to an alarm and opened from the alarms list.
122 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 10 Reports
10.3 Opening a Report Copy
To open a report copy
1 In the object view, find the subfolder (logical unit) containing the report copy.
2 Double-click the report copy.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 123 (240)04-00022-02-en
10 Reports TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
10.4 Printing a Report
To print a report
1 Open the report. For more information on how to open a report, see Section 10.2, “Opening a Report”, on page 122.
2 On the File menu, click Print.
3 The Windows Print dialog box of will be displayed. Select a printer and then click OK.
The paper size and orientation (portrait or landscape) are defined in the properties of the Windows Print dialog box.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
124 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 11 Events
11 Events
11.1 Events OverviewVista Workstation automatically logs all events occurring in the Vista system. By events, we mean any action taken by the users or by the sys-tem itself.
There are four types of events:
• Alarm. This denotes events/actions in the alarms pane or disabled alarms pane. Any alarms that have been tripped or any actions taken by the user due to alarms, for example acknowledging or disabling alarms and so on, are logged as events.
• Object Change. Any changes made to objects/devices in the data-base, for example changing or renaming objects/devices, are logged as events.
• Command. Any commands executed by the system or a user are logged as events, for example logging in, logging out, creating or deleting objects/devices in the database and so on.
• Trend value changes. Modified values in a trend log.
Using the events pane, it is easy to obtain an overview of what has occurred in the system, and to track, for instance, whether a user has made changes to system settings which might be the cause of an alarm.
The database file is to be found in the EVLOG folder in the folder where Vista Workstation was installed, for example C:Program FilesTACTAC Vista WorkstationEVLOGTacEvlog-File.bak.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 125 (240)04-00022-02-en
11 Events TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
11.2 Opening the Events PaneTo open the events pane
• On the View menu, click Events.
11.3 Refreshing the Events ListTo refresh the events list
1 Click the title bar of the events pane to make it the active pane.
2 Press F5 to refresh the events list.
11.4 Resizing Columns in the Events ListTo resize columns in the events list
• In the events pane, right-click the events list and then click Resize Columns.
The columns will be resized to the maximum length of the contents of each columns.
Tip
Alternate methods:
• On the main tool bar, click Events.
Tip
Alternate method:
• Right-click the events list and then click Refresh.
126 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 11 Events
11.5 Viewing an Event in DetailTo view an event in detail
• Right-click the row (event) in the list and click Details.
The event will be displayed in the Event Details dialog box.
Use the buttons to browse to the previous or the next event in the list.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 127 (240)04-00022-02-en
11 Events TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
11.6 Filtering Events in the Events ListNormally, the events list displays all events, but the list can be filtered to display a subset of the events.
To filter the events list by event type
• Right-click a row in the events list, select or clear the commands View Alarms, View Object Changes, View Commands and/or View Trendlogs to show or hide events of the selected event types.
The events list will be updated, displaying the events according to the selected event types.
To customize a filter for the events list
1 Right-click a row in the events list, and then click Filter.
2 In the Event Filter dialog box, use the options on the tabs. Select one or more of the possible filter options and click OK.
128 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 11 Events
The filter will be activated and the events list updated.
To delete an active filter and display all events
• Right-click a row in the events list, and click All Events.
The events list is updated, displaying all events.
Tip
Alternate method:
• On the events list toolbar, click Filter.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 129 (240)04-00022-02-en
11 Events TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
11.7 Viewing Events for an ObjectTo view events for an object
• In the object view, right-click an object and then click View Events.
A window will open with a filter activated which only displays events related to the object you selected.
To save a temporary event view as an event view object
1 Right-click the events list, and then click Save as Event View.
2 Select where to save the event view in the Vista database.
3 In the Object name text box, type a name for the event view object, and then click Save.
The event view will be saved as an event view object in the database.
130 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 11 Events
11.8 Viewing Events for an AlarmTo view events for an alarm
• In the alarms list, select an alarm, right-click and then click View Events.
A window will open with a filter activated which only displays alarm events related to the alarm you selected.
To save a temporary event view as an event view object
1 Right-click the events list, and then click Save as Event View.
2 Select where to save the event view in the Vista database.
3 In the Object name text box, type a name for the event view object, and then click Save.
The event view will be saved as an event view object in the database.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 131 (240)04-00022-02-en
11 Events TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
11.9 Finding a Text in the Events ListThe Find command in the event list enables you to type a text and find any event containing that text. This function searches all columns, except the Type column.
To find a text in the events list
1 In the events list, right-click a row and then click Find.
2 In the Find dialog box, type a text in the Find what box, and click Find Next.
Any row in the events list that contains a text matching the one you typed will be selected in the list. Click Find Next to keep searching through the list.
11.10 Printing the Events ListTo view a print preview
• In the events list, right-click a row and then click Print Preview.
In the preview, you will be able to see the layout of the printed list.
The columns displayed and their width will be in accordance with the settings of the event list.
If you have activated a filter which reduces the types of events displayed or which only shows events for a specific object, then only the events
132 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 11 Events
matching the criteria for the filter you have activated will be displayed in the printed list.
To print the events
• In the events list, right-click a row and then click Print.
The Windows Print dialog box of will be displayed. Select a printer and then click OK.
The paper size and orientation (portrait or landscape) are defined in the properties of the Windows Print dialog box.
Tip
Alternate method:
• In print preview, click Print.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 133 (240)04-00022-02-en
11 Events TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
11.11 Selecting Columns in the Events ListTo select columns in the events list
1 In the events pane, right-click the events list and then click Customize.
2 Click the Select Columns tab.
3 Select the columns to be displayed and then click OK.
Tip
Alternate method:
• Right-click the header of a column in the events list to activate the Events Customization dialog box.
134 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 12 Searching
12 Searching
12.1 Search OverviewVista Workstation includes a search pane which enables you to search the database.
You can search the whole database from the top (root level) and all the branches, or you can limit your search to just one branch of the database.
When selecting criteria for searching the database, you can search among all the objects in the database or limit your search to specific types of objects or devices, for example points/signals, files and so on. You can also search for points/signals and set criteria for one of the attributes of the point/signal, for example the value attribute.
The result of the search is displayed in the search result panes. By default, search results are displayed in the search result 1 pane, but you can also choose to display them in the search result 2 pane.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Tip
• Wildcard characters * and ? are allowed when typing criteria in the Search for devices or objects named text box, in the Look in text box and when searching using a string in the Description property or the Key property (or any other property) for devices/objects.
* – represents one or more characters
? – represents one character
TAC AB, Sept 2007 135 (240)04-00022-02-en
12 Searching TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
12.2 Searching for Objects/DevicesTo search for an object or a device
1 On the View menu, click Search.
2 In the Search for devices or objects named text box, type the name of the object/device you wish to search for. You can use wildcard characters (* or ?) when typing criteria in this text box.
3 In the Look in text box, keep the initial setting, TAC Vista, to search from the top of the database. To search in a specific branch of the database, browse to that branch.
Select the Include subunits option to search in all subfolders/devices below the branch you have selected, in the Look in text box.
4 In the Type of devices or objects text box, keep the initial setting, Units, Logical Objects, to choose to search all types of objects. To search for a one or more object types, browse to and select the object type(s).
5 Click Search Now to start the search.
The result of a search will be displayed in a search result pane.
Vista Workstation displays a maximum of two search result panes. To display the search result in the second result pane, select the Display in Search Result 2 option.
136 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 12 Searching
If you want to limit the search to the first 1,000 items, select the Inter-rupt search if more than 1000 results option.
To search using the property values for objects/devices
Which properties are available depend on what object types you have selected in the Type of devices or objects text box. If you have selected Points, for instance, then all properties available for analog points, binary points and so on, for example, will be available.
Example: Searching for a value between 1,0 and 50
This example deals with searching for points with a value between 10 and 50.
1 Leave the Search for devices or objects named text box blank.
2 In the Look in text box, keep the initial setting, TAC Vista, to search from the top of the database.
3 In the Type of devices or objects text box, browse to and select Points.
4 In the Property value list, click Value. Select the Between option and type the values 10 and 50.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 137 (240)04-00022-02-en
12 Searching TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
5 Click Search Now to start the search.
Note
• Only select the Read property value from device option, if you are connected to the devices and Vista is in Operation mode.
138 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 12 Searching
Example: Searching for text in the description
This example deals with searching for text (a string) in a description, in this particular case all the objects/devices containing the text “tempera-ture”.
1 Leave the Search for devices or objects named text box blank.
2 In the Look in text box, keep the initial setting, TAC Vista, to search from the top of the database.
3 In the Type of devices or objects text box, select Units, Logical Objects.
4 In the Property value box, select Description. Type the text “*temperature*” (without the double quotes).
5 Click Search Now to start the search.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 139 (240)04-00022-02-en
12 Searching TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
140 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 13 Status Watch
13 Status Watch
13.1 Status Watch OverviewStatus watch pane is used for temporarily supervising objects/values in the Vista system.
Objects/Values can easily been dragged to status watch pane from the object view, a graphic, search result 1 or search result 2.
13.2 Adding Objects/Values to the Status Watch PaneTo add an object/value from a graphic
• In an open graphic, point and drag a value from the graphic and drop it into the status watch list in the status watch pane.
To add objects/values from the object view
• In the object view, select one or more objects/values, drag them from the object view and drop them into the status watch list in the status watch pane.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Tip
Alternate method:
• In the status watch list, right-click and then click Insert. Browse through the database. Select one or more objects/values and then click Open.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 141 (240)04-00022-02-en
13 Status Watch TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
To add objects/values from Search Result 1 or Search Result 2
• In search result 1 or search result 2, select one or more objects/val-ues, drag them from the search result and drop them into the status watch list in the status watch pane.
The objects/values will be added to the status watch list and automati-cally activated to display their value.
13.3 Deactivating/Activating Values in the Status Watch Pane
In front of each object/value displayed in status watch, there is an option (check box). If the option is selected, the value will be updated. If the option is not selected, the value will not be updated.
To deactivate objects/values in the status watch pane
• For each object/value in the status watch pane you do not want to see an updated value, clear the option in front of each object.
To activate objects/values in the status watch pane
• For each object/value in status watch pane that you want to see an updated value for, select the option in front of the object.
142 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 13 Status Watch
13.4 Creating an Online ChartTo create an online chart
1 In the status watch pane, right-click an object (row) and then click Start Online Chart.
2 In the online chart, right-click and then click Save as online chart.
3 In the Select dialog box, type a file name in the Object name text box and click Save.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 143 (240)04-00022-02-en
13 Status Watch TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
13.5 Using the Create Trend Log WizardFor more information see Section 16.2, “Creating a Vista Server Trend Log Using the Create Trend Log Wizard”, on page 161.
13.6 Viewing a Trend Chart
To view a trend chart from the status watch pane
1 In the status watch pane, right-click an object (row), point to View Trend Chart and then click the trend chart you wish to view.
A window opens displaying the trend chart you selected.
13.7 Removing Objects/Values from the Status Watch Pane
To remove objects/values from the status watch pane
1 Select one or more objects (rows) in the status watch pane.
2 Right-click and then click Remove.
Note
• This functionality is only available to an object/value that has been logged in a trend log, and the trend log is, directly or indi-rectly, included in one or several trend charts. Trend charts includes logged values from trend logs or trend log calculations.
Note
• Removing objects/values from the status watch pane will not remove them from the database, it will only remove them from the status watch pane.
144 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 14 Viewing/Changing Values
14 Viewing/Changing Values
14.1 Viewing/Changing Values OverviewTo view values in TAC Vista Workstation
Values are displayed in:
• Graphics
• The object view in detailed view, displaying the value column.
• The status watch.
• The properties dialog box of each object.
The value displayed will depend on which mode Vista Workstation is operating in:
• Engineering Mode. This mode is used when working offline. Val-ues displayed in Vista Workstation will be read from the Vista database.
Exception: For values that are updated by Vista when the corre-sponding device is online (dynamic values in pictures, in the Object window, and in the Status Watch and Search Results panes), the online values will still be displayed.
• Operating Mode. This mode is used when working online. Values displayed in Vista Workstation will be read from the devices con-taining the values.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• In a Vista network with several Workstations and one or several Servers, the selection Engineering/Operating mode is now (Vista 4.31) done per Vista Workstation and not, as previously, globally for the network. This means that setting one Worksta-tion in Engineering mode will not force the others to leave the Operating mode.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 145 (240)04-00022-02-en
14 Viewing/Changing Values TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
To change values in TAC Vista Workstation
Changing the value of an object can be performed in:
• Graphics
• The object view in detailed view, displaying the value column.
• The status watch.
• The properties dialog box of each object.
All commands performed on objects, that is creating objects, changing the value of an object, deleting objects and so on, are logged as events in the events list.
Electronic Signature when Changing a Value
If the electronic signature has been activated and applied to the object in question, you will have to type a user name, a password, selecting a cause for changing the value of the object. An optional comment can also be typed.
Changing a value in a dial-up system will cause a dial-up connection to activated to change the value of the device.
14.2 Viewing Values in the Object View
To view values in the object view
1 In the folders pane, browse to the point/value/shortcut you wish to change.
Notes
• Choosing to display the values column in the object view will cause Vista Workstation (in Operating mode) to try to retrieve the current values.
• When using a dial-up system, this will cause Vista Workstation to dial the devices in order to retrieve the values.
146 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 14 Viewing/Changing Values
2 In the object view, right-click (but not on an object), point to View and then click Details to make sure that object are displayed in detailed view.
3 Right-click the column header of the detailed view. Select the Value column and then click OK.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 147 (240)04-00022-02-en
14 Viewing/Changing Values TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
14.3 Selecting Columns in the Object ViewTo select columns in the object view
1 In the object view, right-click the header for the columns.
2 In the Select Columns tab, select the columns to be displayed and then click OK.
148 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 14 Viewing/Changing Values
14.4 Changing a Value in the Object ViewTo change a value in the object view
1 In the object view, click the value of the object you wish to change.
2 Type a new value and press ENTER.
Note
• To be able to change a value in the object view, you must use the detailed view and choose to display the Value column.
Tip
Alternate method:
• Right-click an object and then click Properties. In the Properties dialog box, type a new value and then click OK.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 149 (240)04-00022-02-en
14 Viewing/Changing Values TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
14.5 Enter an Electronic Signature when Changing a Value
To enter an electronic signature when changing a value
1 When the electronic signature is activated, changing a value will cause the Enter Electronic Signature dialog box is displayed.
2 In the Username text box, type the domain and user name for your user account, according to the syntax <domain><user name>, for example Vistadomainjohn.
3 In the Password text box, type the password for your user account.
4 In the Cause text box. choose a pre-defined cause.
5 In the Comment text box, type an optional comment, and then click OK.
Notes
• If the Electronic Signature has been activated and applied to the object in question, you will have to type a user name, a pass-word, selecting a cause for changing the value of the object. An optional comment can also be typed.
• Changing a value in a dial-up system will cause a dial-up con-nection to activated to change the value of the device.
150 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 14 Viewing/Changing Values
14.6 Viewing Values in the Status Watch Pane
To view a value in the status watch pane
• In the object view, or in a search result pane, select one or more objects and drag them to the status watch pane.
Notes
• Selecting to display the values by dragging objects to the status watch pane, will cause Vista Workstation (in operating mode) to try to retrieve the current values.
• When using dial-up system, this will cause Vista Workstation to dial the devices in order to retrieve the values.
Tip
• By default, the Value column is displayed in the status watch pane. If the Value column is not being displayed, right-click the column header, choose to display the Value column, and click OK.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 151 (240)04-00022-02-en
14 Viewing/Changing Values TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
14.7 Changing a Value in the Status Watch PaneTo change a value in the status watch pane
1 In the status watch pane, look in the Value column and click the value of the object you wish to change.
2 Type a new value and press ENTER.
14.8 Xenta Server Pages OverviewA Xenta Server can provide the following pages which can be access by clicking the following objects in Vista Workstation:
• Xenta Server Url – Graphic
• Xenta Server Url – Values
• Xenta Server Url – Events
• Xenta Server Url – Alarms
• Xenta Server Url – Trend log
• Xenta Server Url – HTML
• Xenta Server Url – Time Object
14.8.1 Help for the Xenta Server Pages
When a Xenta Server page is displayed the graphical user interface from the Xenta Server web site is used. Thus, the Help accessible from the toolbar on the Xenta Server page is that of the Xenta Server web site, not the Vista Workstation Help.
When the Help button is clicked you will be informed how to download and view the help pages. Follow the instructions.
Tip
Alternate method:
• Right-click an object and then click Properties. In the Properties dialog box, type a new value and then click OK.
152 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 15 Online Charts
15 Online Charts
15.1 Online Charts OverviewOnline charts graphically display the current value of one or more objects/values in the Vista database. Online charts can support the dis-play of values using both a primary and a secondary y-axis.
By default, an online chart displays up to 86,400 values and updates the chart every 2 seconds. This is a setting that can be done for each chart, by right-clicking the chart and then clicking Edit Online Chart.
After displaying the number of values that the online chart is set to do, it will stop displaying values. To get the online chart to start displaying a new set of values, right-click and then click Clear, or press F5 on the keyboard.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 153 (240)04-00022-02-en
15 Online Charts TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
15.2 Creating an Online ChartTo create an online chart
1 In the object view, select one or more points or shortcuts, right-click and then click Start Online Chart.
2 In the online chart, right-click and then click Save as online chart.
154 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 15 Online Charts
3 In the Select dialog box, type a file name in the Object name text box and then click Save.
15.3 Opening an Online ChartTo open an online chart
1 In the folders pane, browse to find the online chart you wish to open. The object view displays the content of the folders pane.
2 In the object view, double-click the online chart to open it.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 155 (240)04-00022-02-en
15 Online Charts TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
15.4 Adding Values to an Open Online ChartTo add values to an open online chart
1 On the Windows menu, click Cascade.
2 In the object view, select one or more points or shortcuts and drag them to the online chart.
Note
• If you drop the value into the left side of the chart, the value will be displayed using the primary y-axis. If you drop the value into the right side of the chart, the value will be displayed using the secondary y-axis.
156 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 15 Online Charts
15.5 Editing an Online ChartTo edit an online chart
1 In the folders pane, browse to find the online chart you wish to modify. The object view displays the content of the folders pane.
2 In the object view, right-click the online chart and then click Properties.
Tips
Alternate methods:
• In an open online chart, right-click and then click Edit Online Chart. In the dialog box displayed, click the Online Charts tab. Click Add to add a value.
• In an open online chart, right-click and then click Insert a new series. In the Select dialog box, find and select a value and then click Select.
• In the object view, right-click the online chart and then click Properties. In the dialog box displayed, click the Online Charts tab. Click Add to add a value.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 157 (240)04-00022-02-en
15 Online Charts TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
15.6 Deleting an Online ChartTo delete an Online Chart
1 In the object view, right-click the online chart you wish to delete and then click Delete.
2 In the dialog box, click Yes to confirm.
15.7 Printing an Online ChartTo print an online chart
1 Right-click an open online chart, and then click Print.
2 The Windows Print dialog box of will be displayed. Select a printer and then click OK.
The paper size and orientation (portrait or landscape) are defined in the properties of the Windows Print dialog box.
158 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 16 Trend Logging
16 Trend Logging
16.1 Trend Logging Overview
16.1.1 Trend Logging
Trend logging is used to store measured values from a site, for example a carbon dioxide meter in an office, an outdoor thermometer, the energy usage from an energy meter and so on.
Trend logging can be used for a limited time only to help adjusting a system or a process, or, on a permanent basis, to store logged data for reporting for example energy usage.
The “Create trend log” wizards in Vista is used to set up trend logs and displaying them in trend charts.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 159 (240)04-00022-02-en
16 Trend Logging TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
16.1.2 The Trend Log Wizards
The trend log wizards are used to simplify logging and displaying data in Vista Workstation.
The trend log wizards use pre-defined trend log profiles to assist in cre-ating various types of trend logs.
Each trend log profile:
• Creates one trend log object.
• Can create four different types of trend log calculation; one per day, one per week, one per month and/or one per year. The trend log calculation objects can either be a sum or an average of the values from the trend log object.
• Can create a trend chart. It is also possible to reuse an existing trend chart. The trend chart can display values from the trend log objects or from the trend log calculation objects.
You can use the settings made by the trend log profile you have selected as they are, or you can make changes before finishing the wizard.
Fig. 16.1: Schematic view of a trend log wizard in Vista
00015893
TrendLog
TrendChart
Trend LogCalculation
160 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 16 Trend Logging
16.2 Creating a Vista Server Trend Log Using the Create Trend Log Wizard
To create a Vista Server trend log using the Create Trend Log wizard
1 In the object view, alarms, status watch or a graphic, right-click the object/value/shortcut you want to log, point to Create Trend Log, then click Vista Server Trend Log
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 161 (240)04-00022-02-en
16 Trend Logging TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
2 On the Welcome to the Create Trend Log Wizard page.
If you do not wish to see the welcome page again, select the Do not show this information page again option.
3 Click Next.
4 On the Trend Log Profile page, select one of the predefined trend log profiles suitable for the type of object/value you have selected to log.
If you are familiar with the selected profile, click Finish. The wiz-ard will create a trend log, a trend log calculation object and/or trend chart, that corresponds to the settings of the selected trend log profile.
162 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 16 Trend Logging
5 If you are not familiar with the trend log profile you have selected, click Next to view the settings suggested for that profile.
On the Trend Log Parameters page, you can view/change the log point, the path for saving the trend log object in the Vista database, and the name of the trend log object.
6 Click Next to continue.
On the Trend Log Profile page, you can view/change the settings for the trend log.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 163 (240)04-00022-02-en
16 Trend Logging TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
7 Click Next to continue.
On the Trend Log Calculation page, you can view/change a trend log calculation object and decide if you want to use it.
8 Click Next to continue.
On the Trend Chart page, you can view/change the settings of the trend chart.
9 Click Next to continue.
164 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 16 Trend Logging
10 On the Completing the Create Trend Log Wizard page, click Finish to create the objects in accordance with the selections you made in the wizard, or click Cancel to quit the wizard without cre-ating any objects.
Notes
• By default, trend logs, trend log calculation objects and/or trend charts are named after the selected log point and stored in the same location as the log point in the database.
• After you have clicked Finish in the wizard, Vista Workstation will verify if the program is in Operating mode. If that is not the case, a message asks you if you want to activate Operating mode. Click Yes to go to Operating mode and finish the wizard.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 165 (240)04-00022-02-en
16 Trend Logging TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
16.3 Creating a Xenta Trend Log Using the Create Trend Log Wizard
To create a Xenta trend log using the Create Trend Log wizard
1 In the object view, alarms, status watch or a graphic, right-click the object/value/shortcut you want to log, point to Create Trend Log, then click Xenta Trend Log
2 On the Welcome to the Create Xenta Trend Log Wizard page.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
166 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 16 Trend Logging
If you do not wish to see the welcome page again, select the Do not show this information page again option.
3 Click Next.
4 On the Xenta Trend Log Profile page, select one of the pre-defined trend log profile that is suitable for the type of object/value you have decided to log.
If you are familiar with the selected profile, click Finish. The wiz-ard will create a trend log, a trend log calculation object and/or trend chart, according to the settings of the selected trend log pro-file.
5 If you are not familiar with the trend log profile you have selected, click Next to view the settings suggested for that profile.
On the Xenta Trend Log Parameters page, you can view/change the log point, the path for saving the trend log object in the Vista database, and the name of the trend log object.
6 Click Next to continue.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 167 (240)04-00022-02-en
16 Trend Logging TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
On the Xenta Trend Log Profile page, you can view/change the settings for the trend log.
7 Click Next to continue.
On the Trend Log Calculation page, you can view/change a trend log calculation object and decide if you want to use it.
8 Click Next to continue.
On the Trend Chart page, you can view/change the settings of the trend chart.
9 Click Next to continue.
168 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 16 Trend Logging
10 On the Completing the Create Trend Log Wizard page, click Finish to create the objects in accordance with the selections you made in the wizard, or click Cancel to quit the wizard without cre-ating any objects.
Notes
• By default, trend logs, trend log calculation objects and/or trend charts are named after the selected log point and stored in the same location as the log point in the database.
• After you have clicked Finish in the wizard, Vista Workstation will verify if the program is in Operating mode. If that is not the case, a message asks you if you want to activate Operating mode. Click Yes to go to Operating mode and finish the wizard.
• To be able to use the wizard, you must have the authority to cre-ate trend logs in Vista and you must be working in Operating mode.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 169 (240)04-00022-02-en
16 Trend Logging TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
16.4 Trend Log Profiles
16.4.1 Using the Trend Log Profiles
The trend log wizard uses a number of predefined log profiles; they are suitable for logging different types of objects/values and can display them in an online chart. All the trend log profiles use the same measure-ment unit as the point/object you have select to log in a trend log.
The following default profiles are available:
• Temperature per hour
• Average Temperature per day
• Heating per 24 hours (before midnight)
• Heating per 24 hours (after midnight)
• Electricity per hour
• Electricity per 24 hours (before midnight)
• Electricity per 24 hours (after midnight)
• Water per 24 hours (before midnight)
• Water per 24 hours (after midnight)
• Carbon Dioxide (CO2) every 10 minutes
• Log a generic value every 10 minutes
For detailed information on each trend log profile, see Chapter 20, “Trend Log Profiles”, on page 221.
16.5 Viewing a Trend Chart
For detailed information on how to view a trend chart, see Chapter 9.6, “Viewing a Trend Chart”, on page 111.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
170 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 16 Trend Logging
16.6 Viewing Logged Values in a Trend Log as a Table
To view logged values in a trend log as a table
1 In the object view, right-click a trend log and click View Log.
2 When you have finished viewing the values in the log values dia-log box, click the Close button.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Notes
• If Vista Workstation is in Operating mode and the trend log being used stores logged values in a device, then Vista will connect to the device in order to retrieve the most recent logged values.
• If Vista Workstation is in Engineering mode, the logged values will be retrieved from the Vista database.
• If you view a Xenta Server trend log in Vista Workstation that is Man-Off, Vista will not connect to the Xenta Server in order to retrieve the most recent logged values, but only read values archived in Vista.
Tips
• The View Log dialog box will normally only show the 1,000 most recently logged values in a trend log. The value of how many logged values to display is set individually for each trend log object.
• You can override this setting and display all the values in a trend log by holding down the SHIFT key on the keyboard while click-ing on View Log.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 171 (240)04-00022-02-en
16 Trend Logging TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
16.7 Viewing Logged Values in a Trend Chart
To view logged values in a trend chart
1 Right-click the log for which you want to view the trend chart.
2 Point to View Trend, and then click one of the available trend(s). A trailing “(chart)” indicates that the trend chart is a Vista Work-station trend chart.
16.8 Viewing Logged Values on a Trend Page
To view logged values on a trend page
1 Right-click the log for which you want to view the trend page.
2 Point to View Trend, and then click one of the available trend(s). A trailing “(page)” indicates that the trend is a Xenta Server trend page.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Notes
• If Vista Workstation is in Operating mode and the trend log being used stores logged values in a device, then Vista will connect to the device in order to retrieve the most recent logged values.
• If Vista Workstation is in Engineering mode, the logged values will be retrieved from the Vista database.
• If you view a Xenta Server trend log in Vista Workstation that is Man-Off, Vista will not connect to the Xenta Server in order to retrieve the most recent logged values, but only read values archived in Vista.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
172 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 16 Trend Logging
16.9 Copying Trend Log Values to Microsoft Excel
To copy trend log values to Microsoft Excel
1 In the object view, right-click a trend log and click View Log.
2 In the log values dialog box, right-click and then click Copy.
3 Start Microsoft Excel. Select the A1 cell in an empty spreadsheet, right-click and then click Paste.
The values will be pasted into three columns, Date, Value and Origin.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 173 (240)04-00022-02-en
16 Trend Logging TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
16.10 Printing Trend Log Values
To print trend log values
1 In the object view, right-click a trend log and click View Log.
2 In the log values dialog box, click Print.
3 The Windows Print dialog box will be displayed. Select a printer and then click OK.
The paper size and orientation (portrait or landscape) are defined in the properties of the Windows Print dialog box.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
174 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 16 Trend Logging
16.11 Editing Trend Log ValuesTo edit trend log values
1 Right-click the trend log object you want to modify.
2 Select View Log.
3 Select the values you want to change.
4 Right-click and click Edit.
5 Change the value.
6 In the Edit dialog box, choose Just change the edited item if you just want to change one value. Choose Change all selected items if you want to change all selected items.
7 Click OK.
The modified values are now marked Edited.
All changed values are recorded in the event log and are easily checked.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 175 (240)04-00022-02-en
16 Trend Logging TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
16.12 Checking Edited Trend Log ValuesTo check edited trend log values
1 Right-click the trend log object and select View Events.
2 In the events list, click Filter.
3 Ensure that only Trend value changes is selected.
4 Click OK.
176 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 16 Trend Logging
5 In the events list, right-click the event you want to check and click Details.
6 The Event Details dialog shows the time of the editing, the old value and the new value.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 177 (240)04-00022-02-en
16 Trend Logging TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
16.13 I/NET Trend Samples
Assign a Trend Sampling extension to an I/NET point if you want to collect data to be used in a graph or printed in a report. This extension is available with all I/NET point types.
16.13.1 Adding/opening an I/NET Trend Sample
To add/open an I/NET trend sample
1 In the folder pane, expand the Xenta 527 server and locate the I/NET object.
This object is a container for I/NET points, point extensions, and configuration objects.
2 Expand the I/NET object and its underlying branches until the point type portion of the desired I/NET point is visible.
The following example shows I/NET point 55220004 DO selected in the folder pane.
3 Expand the point type portion of the I/NET point to view its avail-able HTML pages.
4 Click on the Trend Configuration page to view the point’s trend setup.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
178 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 16 Trend Logging
If the selected I/NET point already has a trend sample extension, the trend configuration page opens.
5 If the selected I/NET point does not already have a trend sample extension, you will be presented with a message asking if you would like to add the extension now.
Confirm that you wish to add the trend by clicking Yes. The trend configuration page opens.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 179 (240)04-00022-02-en
16 Trend Logging TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
16.13.2 Editing an I/NET Trend Sample
To edit an I/NET trend sample
1 From the open trend setup editor, use the available parameters to configure the I/NET trend. If necessary, refer to your I/NET Seven documentation for a detailed description of each parameter.
2 Click Save to save your settings.
3 At any time while working in the trend setup editor, you can click Graph to view the point’s trend chart.
16.13.3 Deleting an I/NET Trend Sample
To delete an I/NET trend sample
1 From the open trend setup editor, click Delete.
2 Confirm that you wish to delete the trend by clicking OK.
180 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 17 Time Functions
17 Time Functions
17.1 Time Charts OverviewThree types of time charts are available in Vista:
• Global Time Charts. This type of object (Time Chart – Global) can only be created in the top (root) level of the Vista database. Time charts of this type are visible and can be used on all comput-ers in a Vista system.
• Local Time Charts. This type of object (Time Chart – Local) can be created in folders below the top (root) level of the Vista data-base. Time charts of this type are only visible on the computer they have been created on.
• TAC Xenta Time Charts. This object type (Time Chart – TAC Xenta) is created in Menta, while programming an application for the Xenta device. This type of time chart can be modified in Vista Workstation.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Notes
• A Xenta time chart can be replaced by a central time chart.
• A central time chart is a time chart created in Vista Workstation, that is a global time chart or a local time chart.
• We recommend that you use a global time chart when replacing a Xenta time chart.
• It is possible to specify time intervals over the midnight hour.
• All alternative events will appear with a bold date in the calendar.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 181 (240)04-00022-02-en
17 Time Functions TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
17.2 Time Charts
17.2.1 Opening a Time Chart
To open a time chart
1 In the folders pane, navigate to the time chart you wish to open. The object View will display the content of the folders pane.
2 In the object view, double-click the time chart to open it.
182 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 17 Time Functions
17.2.2 Overviewing a Time Chart
• To get an overview of all time events, click All Events.
Notes
• Alternative Charts are shown with From and To dates (yearly alternative events appear with the year shown as “****”).
• Weekly events lack the From and To dates.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 183 (240)04-00022-02-en
17 Time Functions TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
17.2.3 Adding an Event in a Time Chart
To add an event to a time chart
1 In the time chart window, point to the time when you want the new event to start. Hold down the left mouse button and draw an area representing the time period for the new event.
2 Click New.
3 If necessary, modify the settings for the event and click OK.
.
Tip
Alternate method:
• Hold down the left mouse button and draw an area representing the time period for the new time event. Right-click, and click New. If necessary, modify the settings for the event and click OK.
184 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 17 Time Functions
17.2.4 Editing an Event in a Time Chart
To edit an event in a time chart
1 Double-click the event you wish to modify.
2 Modify the settings for the event and then click OK.
Tips
Alternate methods:
• Click the event you wish to modify and click Edit. Modify the settings for the time event and click OK.
• Click the event you wish to modify. Right-click the event and click Edit. Modify the settings for the time event and click OK.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 185 (240)04-00022-02-en
17 Time Functions TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
17.2.5 Deleting an Event in a Time Chart
To delete an event in a time chart
1 In the time chart window, click the event you wish to delete.
2 Click Delete.
3 Click Yes to delete the event.
Tip
Alternate method:
• Click the time event you wish to delete. Right-click the event and click Delete. Click Yes to delete the time event.
186 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 17 Time Functions
17.3 TAC Xenta Time Charts
17.3.1 Opening a TAC Xenta Time Chart
To open a TAC Xenta time chart
1 In the folders pane, browse to the Xenta time chart you wish to open.
2 In the object view, double-click the Xenta time chart to open it.
Notes
• Xenta time charts are located in the application modules of the Xenta devices.
• The Xenta devices are located in the networks below the Opera-tor Unit.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 187 (240)04-00022-02-en
17 Time Functions TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
17.3.2 Adding an Event in a TAC Xenta Time Chart
To add an event to a TAC Xenta time chart
1 In the time chart window, point to the time when you want the new time event to start. Hold down the left mouse button and draw an area representing the time period for the new event.
2 Click New.
3 If necessary, modify the settings for the event and click OK.
Tip
Alternate method:
• Hold down the left mouse button and draw an area representing the time period for the new event. Right-click, and click New. If necessary, modify the settings for the event and click OK.
188 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 17 Time Functions
17.3.3 Editing an Event in a TAC Xenta Time Chart
To edit an event in a TAC Xenta time chart
1 Double-click the event you wish to modify.
2 Modify the settings for the event and then click OK.
Tips
Alternate methods:
• Click the event you wish to modify and click Edit. Modify the settings for the event and click OK.
• Click the event you wish to modify. Right-click the event and click Edit. Modify the settings for the event and click OK.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 189 (240)04-00022-02-en
17 Time Functions TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
17.3.4 Deleting an Event in a TAC Xenta Time Chart
To delete an event in a TAC Xenta time chart
1 In the time chart window, click the event you wish to delete.
2 Click Delete.
3 Click Yes to delete the event.
Tip
Alternate method:
• Click the event you wish to delete. Right-click the event and click Delete. Click Yes to delete the event.
190 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 17 Time Functions
17.3.5 Replacing a TAC Xenta Time Chart with a Central Time Chart
You can replace a weekly chart, and/or an alternative Xenta chart for a Xenta device, with time charts created in Vista Workstation.
To replace a TAC Xenta Time Chart with a Central Time Chart
1 Open the Xenta time chart.
2 Click the Central Time Charts tab.
3 To replace the weekly time chart, browse to a time chart in Vista in the Week Chart text box.
4 To replace the alternative time chart, browse to a time chart in Vista in the Alternative Chart text box.
5 Click OK.
Note
• If an event in an alternative Xenta chart is defined for a specific date, then all normal week chart events for that date will be void.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 191 (240)04-00022-02-en
17 Time Functions TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
17.4 I/NET Time Schedule
17.4.1 I/NET Time Schedule
I/NET Time Schedule Types
Three types of I/NET Time Schedules are available in Vista:
• Master – Can be used as a base schedule for several points.
• Slave – Follows a specific master schedule, but allows you to define an offset period for each action or to even ignore the action entirely.
• Independent – Used only for a particular point. Its control deci-sions are not based on the schedule of any other point.
If an I/NET Time Schedule is opened by double-clicking it in the object view or opened from a color graphic, Vista will display the I/NET time schedule editor.
Using the I/NET time schedule editor, it is possible to define a schedule for a specific DC or DO point currently residing in a controller, for any day of the week.
I/NET Time Schedule
Each time schedule allows 17 entries (actions/times) to be added for each DC or DO point. Schedule actions can be entered in random order, with no attention paid to the chronological order of events. When you exit from the schedule, the controller rearranges the actions into chro-nological order for independent schedules. Master and slave schedule actions will remain in the order in which they were entered.
Each of the schedule types (Master, Slave, and Independent) also allows you to enter actions and times for alternate schedules (Temporary and Special Day schedules).
192 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 17 Time Functions
Example:
Modifying an independent time schedule.
1 From the I/NET Time Schedule Editor, click a blank entry line and then click the Add button. The Time Schedule Action Editor appears.
2 Select the appropriate action (for example Start).
3 Enter the appropriate time (24-hour format only).
4 Define the time schedule:
• If the entry is to be applied as a normal time schedule, select the days when the action is to be applied.
• If the entry is to be applied as an alternate schedule and you want it to recur each year (that is a standard holiday sched-ule), then select the Special Day schedule that is to be applied for that action.
• If the entry is to be applied as an alternate schedule during the current week, then select the Temporary schedule that is to be applied for that action
Note
• Special Day schedules for specific dates should be pre-defined using the Special Day Editor in I/NET.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 193 (240)04-00022-02-en
17 Time Functions TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
5 Click OK.
Your new entry should appear in the time schedule editor as seen below.
To tag a Day as Temporary
The spin dials in the I/NET time schedule editor allow you to tag any of the coming seven days as “Temporary”. When you tag a day as T1, I/NET issues only the commands that are applicable to Temporary Sched-ule 1. Days tagged as T2 will be issued only to those commands appli-cable to Temporary Schedule 2. If you tag a day as Both, then both T1 and T2 commands will be issued to the point.
Notes
• If you choose to use a temporary time schedule, for example T1, but you also want the normal time schedule for that specific day to be applied, then you will have to check the Temporary 1 checkbox in the Action Editor. A “Y” will be displayed in the T1 column for that normal day entry.
• The same applies to Special Day schedules. If you choose to use a Special Day schedule, for example S1, but you also want the normal time schedule for that specific day to be applied, then you will have to check the Special 1 checkbox in the Action Editor. A “Y” will be displayed in the S1 column for that normal day entry.
194 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 18 Dial-up Communication
18 Dial-up Communication
18.1 Dial-Up Communication OverviewDial-Up communication means establishing communication between a Vista Server and the network and devices of a site. Modems are used to dial-up and initiate a path of communication in order to send data and alarms from the site to the Vista Server.
Dial-up communication from the site is automatically initiated, when you open a dialog box, window or pane in Vista Workstation to view values or alarms.
The dial-up connection is automatically disconnected (after a time out) when all dialog boxes, windows or panes displaying values or alarms has been closed.
A dial-up connection can also be initiated by a device to send alarms or data to a Vista Server. After the device has finished sending alarms or data the dial-up connection is closed (after a time out).
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Tips
• Activate the auto-logout feature for all users in Vista systems that uses dial-up connections. The auto-logout will automatically log out any inactive users, closing any open dialog boxes, windows and panes in Vista Workstation.
• This will prevent an inactive user from keeping a dial-up connec-tion up and running.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 195 (240)04-00022-02-en
18 Dial-up Communication TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
18.2 Monitoring a Dial-Up Connection in ProgressWhen a dial-up connection is in progress, this will be displayed in the lower right corner of the status bar of Vista Workstation.
A telephone icon is displayed along with texts explaining the status of the connection in progress:
• Initialization. Information about the Vista Server and modem, along with the initialization string for the modem, is displayed, for example VistaSRV_1-Modem1: Initializing (ATS12=1).
• Dialing. While dialing, the number of seconds remaining is dis-played, for example: VistaSRV_1-Modem1:Dialing (Time left: 12 s).
• Error messages. If an error occurs, an error message will be dis-played in the tooltip, for example Error 417 (No dial tone).
When the connection has been established, information about the modem/dial-up connection will be removed from the status bar.
To monitor a dial-up connection in progress
1 Look at the lower right corner of the status bar in Vista Worksta-tion.
2 The status bar is automatically updated with information. If you have more than one modem, point to the telephone icon and a tool-tip will display information about all the available modems/dial-up connections.
196 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 19 I/NET Features
19 I/NET Features
19.1 The I/NET Host Tool
19.1.1 I/NET Host Tool Overview
Vista Workstation uses I/NET Seven as a tool for configuring I/NET objects.
If I/NET’s I/O server is not already running on your workstation, launching the I/NET host tool causes the I/O server to load automati-cally. In this case, an I/O server icon will appear in the system tray area of the Windows taskbar.
19.1.2 I/NET Licenses
The I/NET host tool provides a subset of the features that are found in a standard I/NET Seven system. The actual features provided by the I/NET host tool will depend on how I/NET is licensed in your Vista sys-tem.
The following two types of I/NET licenses are available:
• Integrated — Provides basic I/NET system functions as well as functions associated with HVAC.
• Security — Provides basic I/NET system functions as well as functions associated with access control.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• The actual I/O server icon that appears in the system tray will depend on how your I/NET system is currently configured. Refer to your I/NET Seven documentation for a complete description of all I/O server icons.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 197 (240)04-00022-02-en
19 I/NET Features TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
Licensed I/NET features
The following table lists the features that are available in TAC Vista Workstation for each type of I/NET license. The table also includes fea-tures that are common to both licenses. It is possible to have one, both, or neither license.
Table 19.1: Licensed I/NET Features
I/NET License
Feature Provided
Either license
The following features are common to both types of I/NET licenses. System features:
• Change password• Connect/disconnect• Logon/logoff
• Quit• Work offline
Host features:
• Host configuration editor• Host password editor• Host phone numbers editor• Host software restore editor
• Netcon function editor• Network configuration editor• System view
Tap features:
• Host, link, and site tap configuration• Site tap remote configuration
• Site tap save/restore
Controller features:
• 7720 configuration editor• Action messages summary• Alarm extension editor• Calculation editor• Control description editor• Conversion coefficient editor• DCU configuration editor• DCU save editor• DCU restore editor• DCU password editor• DPU configuration editor• Engineering units editor• Event extension editor• Event sequences summary
• I1/I2 stat parameters editor• Lighting circuits editor• Lighting zones editor• LCD page definition editor• Lookup table editor• MCU configuration editor• MR configuration editor• Resident point editor• Special days editor• State descriptions editor• Time schedule extension editor• Trend extension editor• Trend plot view dialog box
Summaries:
• Configuration summary• Controller summary
• Disabled points summary• Off-normal points summary
Reporting features:
• SevenReports (operates in view-only mode if no I/NET CD key is installed)
198 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 19 I/NET Features
Integrated The following features are only available with the “Integrated” I/NET license. Controller features:
• Consumption extension editor• DDC modules summary• Demand control extension editor• MR DDC Summary• Override billing equipment map-
ping editor• Override billing extension editor
• Override billing parameter editor• Runtime extension editor• Temperature control extension editor• Unitary control configuration editor• Unitary control extension editor
Security The following features are only available with the “Security” I/NET license. Controller access features:
• Elevator extension editor• DCU AIC editor• Door extension editor
• Personnel schedules• SCU parameters editor
Host access features:
• Access control options editor• Access control wizard• AIC editor• Door extension editor• Groups editor• Individuals editor• Key translation editor
Summaries• Door tenant summary
• Personnel schedules• Pin generation dialog box• Recycle bin• SCU editor• Tenant editor• User search
Table 19.1: Licensed I/NET Features (Contd.)
I/NET License
Feature Provided
TAC AB, Sept 2007 199 (240)04-00022-02-en
19 I/NET Features TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
19.1.3 Launch the I/NET Host Tool
There are two methods for launching the I/NET host tool:
• Application method — When you manually launch the I/NET host tool from Vista Workstation’s main menu, it launches as an appli-cation with all of the functions applicable to the installed license.
• Point-sensitive method — When you edit an I/NET object in Vista Workstation, the I/NET host tool automatically launches as a background task (that is, the main window is hidden) in order to display the appropriate I/NET editor.
To launch the I/NET host tool as an application
1 On the Tools menu, click TAC I/NET Host Tool.
2 If I/NET Seven is configured to automatically log you in using your Windows “user” account, the I/NET host application opens ready to use. Otherwise, you are presented with a login dialog box.
Login by typing a valid Operator Name and Host Password, and selecting OK.
To launch a point-sensitive I/NET editor
1 In the folder pane, locate the desired I/NET system point. Expand each branch of the I/NET point until the point type portion of the point is visible. See Section 19.2, “I/NET Points”, on page 201 for an example.
2 Right-click the I/NET point, select Edit, and then select an avail-able function. The I/NET host tool launches the appropriate I/NET editor.
200 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 19 I/NET Features
19.2 I/NET Points
19.2.1 I/NET Points Overview
I/NET points reside in the controllers that connect to the I/NET net-work. They are either external points such as a temperature sensor, internal points such as a calculation, or indirect points such as a com-mon outside air temperature among controllers.
19.2.2 I/NET Point Types
• Analog input (AI) points – AI points sense a variable and convert the input from current or voltage (analog value) to counts and then to a displayed value. It differs from a DI point in that it senses a value (such as 72 degrees) rather than a binary condition of one of two possible states.
• Analog output (AO) points – AO points also encompass pulse width modulated (PWM) outputs. AO and PWM outputs both use analog point processing. In I/NET, if you have a 7700, 7716, 7718, 7756, MR123-032MB, MR632, or 7728 I/SITE I/O controller, you have the option of using true AO points or PWM points. All other controllers provide only PWM points.
A true AO point uses a digital-to-analog converter to convert counts to analog signals. Typically the output, either 4–20 mA or 0–10 VDC, is used to reposition a device such as a valve actuator or damper operator.
A PWM point does not use a digital-to-analog converter. In terms of the hardware, a PWM output point is really a DO point operating with AO point processing. As the value of the PWM point varies, so does the pulse duration of the hardware output.
• Digital input (GI) points – This is a specialized DI point that requires the use of eight consecutive bit offset addresses. Only the first address (typically bit offset = 00) is defined in the database. The location of these addresses varies depending on the type of controller.
Digital input points create an equipment value based on the state of eight contacts using one point address and all eight of its associated bit offsets (values 00–07). Depending on the bit or bits energized, an equipment unit value, called “counts”, is produced.
Digital Input Conversion – The equipment unit value ranges from 0 to 255 (see table below). Equipment values are additive. For example, all contacts open results in an equipment unit value of zero (0); all contacts closed results in an equipment unit value of 255; contacts 00, 01, and 07 energized results in an equipment value of 131 (1 + 2 + 128 = 131).
TAC AB, Sept 2007 201 (240)04-00022-02-en
19 I/NET Features TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
• Digital output (GO) points – A GO point is a specialized DO point that, like the GI point type, requires eight consecutive point addresses.
As with the GI point, only the first address is defined. The next seven hardware inputs and addresses are not defined; however, they cannot be used for any other purpose. The point addresses for GO points vary by controller. On some controllers, these addresses will have the same point portion (PP), with bit offsets (BB) 00–07. On other controllers, the point portion (PP) will be different, and all bit offsets (BB) will be 00. Refer to your I/NET Seven documenta-tion for GO point addressing for specific controllers.
Digital output points energize up to eight consecutive discrete out-put points, based on an equipment unit value (X). Engineering unit value (Y) is converted to equipment unit value (X) using conver-sion coefficients.
Digital Output Conversion – The equipment unit value, called “counts” (X), ranges from 0 to 255. Calculation of the slope (m) and Y-intercept (b) is identical to that for an analog output point driving a D/A converter, except the equipment unit value (X) deter-mines which of the 8 discrete outputs will be energized (see the table below). Equipment values are additive. For example, if the equipment unit value (X) is 75, discrete outputs 1, 2, 4, and 7 are energized (1 + 2 + 8 + 64 = 75).
Table 19.2: Digital Input Equipment Unit Values
Point Address (bit offset) Equipment Unit Value
00 1
01 2
02 4
03 8
04 16
05 32
06 64
07 128
202 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 19 I/NET Features
• Discrete alarm (DA) points – This is a specialized DI point. Use it when you want to be aware of an alarm condition sensed by a contact opening/closing. Multiple contacts may be monitored for up to eight states for the point. For a binary (two-state) point, the two states of a DA point are NORMAL and ALARM. You deter-mine which state (0 or 1) is “normal”. This point may be super-vised (monitored for shorts or breaks in the line).
• Discrete input (DI) points – DI points sense the state of a contact that can be measured with single or multiple closures. The point is considered binary if it exists in one of two possible states: ON or OFF, OPEN or CLOSED, etc. The maximum number of states for a point is eight, which requires three contacts (bits).
Typical DI points are flow verification (yes/no) on a fan or pump, high level float switch closure, or door switch (open or closed). This point type may be supervised (monitored for breaks or shorts in the line), but it will not produce an alarm indication.
• Discrete monitor (DM) and discrete control (DC) points – These points are always used in a pair. They control devices that would otherwise be controlled by an ordinary DO point but are considered critical enough to warrant a DM/DC combination. The DC point does the actual controlling (opening and closing of the hardware contact) and the DM point provides positive feedback from an external discrete device (for example, an air flow switch).
The DM point is typically wired to a proof-of-flow switch that tran-sitions when the controlled device is started or stopped. It may also be used to monitor an auxiliary contact on a motor starter if a proof-of-flow switch is not installed. However, used in this way, the only information you are really receiving is that the contacts
Table 19.3: Digital Output Equipment Unit Values
Equipment Unit Value Discrete Output Energized
1 1
2 2
4 3
8 4
16 5
32 6
64 7
128 8
TAC AB, Sept 2007 203 (240)04-00022-02-en
19 I/NET Features TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
have closed or opened, but not whether the device is actually run-ning.
The DC point senses deviation between the commanded state and the monitored state, and provides an alarm if the controller com-mands the DC point ON or OFF and the DM point does not transi-tion. The DC point also generates an alarm if an external force alters the state of the DM input point and the output point was not changed; for example, an operator using a “Hand-Off-Auto” switch.
• Discrete output (DO) points – DO points control the state of binary outputs. These points are typically used for turning devices such as fans, pumps, and lights on and off. DO points are also used for door-related points (door strike) if you are using access con-trol. I/NET door points always use bit offset addresses of 08 or 09.
• Pulsed input (PI) points – PI or accumulator points accumulate pulses from the data environment and convert them into engineer-ing unit values. External PI points are capable of accepting pulses from such devices as electric demand pulse meters, flow meters, or other devices that convert a flow to a pulsed output. Internal accumulators can accumulate not only pulses but analog values as well, and in the case of an integrating accumulator, can convert an instantaneous rate input into a total value.
204 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 19 I/NET Features
19.2.3 Viewing I/NET Points
I/NET points associated with a Xenta 527 Server are accessible from the folder pane in TAC Vista Workstation. When you select an I/NET point in the folder pane, point-specific functions become available. Your abil-ity to access and use these functions will depend on whether or not the I/NET host tool is installed and how it is licensed. For more information on licenses, see Section 19.1.1, “I/NET Host Tool Overview”, on page 197.
To view I/NET Points
• Using the following graphic as an example, locate and expand branches in the folder pane to expose I/NET points and their sub-ordinate objects.
This example shows the point type portion of I/NET point 55220003 DC highlighted in the folder pane. For more information on point type, see Section 19.2.1, “I/NET Points Overview”, on page 201.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 205 (240)04-00022-02-en
19 I/NET Features TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
19.2.4 Selecting an I/NET Point
Many of the I/NET-related tasks that you can perform in Vista Work-station require that you first locate and select an I/NET point.
To select an I/NET point
1 In the folder pane, expand the Xenta 527 server and locate the I/NET object.
This object is a container for I/NET points, point extensions, and configuration objects.
2 Expand the I/NET object and its underlying branches until the point type portion of the desired I/NET point is visible.
3 Click on the point type portion of the I/NET point.
The following example shows I/NET point 55220003 DC selected in the folder pane.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
206 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 19 I/NET Features
19.2.5 Using Point-specific Features
To open point-specific HTML pages
1 Expand the point type portion of an I/NET point to view its avail-able HTML pages.
2 Select an HTML page to open it in Vista.
To open point-specific I/NET editors
1 Right-click on the point type portion of an I/NET point and select Edit.
2 Select a function to launch its associated I/NET editor.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• I/NET editors are only available from within Vista Workstation when its configuration includes the I/NET host tool.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 207 (240)04-00022-02-en
19 I/NET Features TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
19.2.6 Controlling an I/NET Point
In order to control an I/NET point from Vista, you must first open its point control editor. Vista provides an HTML-based editor for this pur-pose.
If your configuration of Vista Workstation includes the I/NET host tool, you also have the option of using I/NET’s point control editor.
To control an I/NET point
1 In the folder pane, locate the desired I/NET system point. Expand each branch of the I/NET point until the point type portion of the point is visible. See Section 19.2, “I/NET Points”, on page 201 for an example.
2 Open the point’s “Point Control” HTML page or launch I/NET’s point control editor. If necessary, refer to “Using Point-specific Features”, above, for instructions.
3 With the Point Control editor open, control an I/NET point using the following functions:
• Control State – This drop-down list allows you to select a control state for manual control of both input and output points. The list contains the state descriptions defined in I/NET”s State Descriptions Editor. The control commands that are actually sent to the point are defined in I/NET’s Con-trol Descriptions Editor.
• Download – Use this function to download the selected con-trol state to the point.
• Test On/Test Off – Allows you to toggle the point between the two options (test mode “ON” or test mode “OFF”). Use the Test mode to isolate one or more points from external hardware. This allows you to verify controller operation for selected points without affecting or using the external hard-ware. This also allows you to manually enter states/values for points.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• While using the Test mode, the controller continues to update the database for the selected point. Your states/values for the point can be overridden by the controller. To prevent the controller from overriding you states/values, also place the point in Manual mode.
208 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 19 I/NET Features
• Manual/Automatic – Allows you to toggle the point between the two options (manual mode or automatic mode). Manual mode disables all automatic functions from controlling the external hardware (that is, ATS, DDC, Demand, and so on).
• Alarm Ack – Allows you to acknowledge an alarm if the selected point is in alarm.
• Release – (Door Outputs only) Allows you to momentarily release the output strike for a door.
• APB Reset – (Door Outputs only) Removes the anti-passback flags from the select door and any other doors within the same zone as the selected door. Use of this command causes I/NET to generate an audit trial message. Refer to Resetting the Anti-Passback Flag for more information.
Note
• While a point is in the Manual mode, the state/value you enter is also sent to the connected hardware.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 209 (240)04-00022-02-en
19 I/NET Features TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
19.2.7 Setting a Point’s Message Routing Parameters
To configure a point’s routing parameters for alarms/messages
1 In the folder pane, locate the desired I/NET system point. Expand each branch of the I/NET point until the point type portion of the point is visible. See Section 19.2, “I/NET Points”, on page 201 for an example.
2 Open the point’s “Alarm Configuration” HTML page or launch I/NET’s alarm configuration editor. If necessary, refer to Section 19.2.5, “Using Point-specific Features”, on page 207, for general instructions.
3 Choose a Distribution Group.
This will determine which set of 8 masks will be used for compar-ison at I/NET’s Tap or host level.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
HTML-based editor
I/NET editor
210 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 19 I/NET Features
4 Define the Distribution Mask. Activate or deactivate any of eight mask positions.
When a message is generated from the I/NET point, each of the point’s mask positions gets compared to corresponding mask posi-tions in the host or Tap. If any corresponding mask positions are activated at both the point level and Tap/host level, the point-related message data will be transmitted.
5 Choose a Message Priority setting. This setting controls when messages will be sent to the host computer.
6 Choose an Alarm Priority setting. This setting controls when alarms will be sent to the host computer.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 211 (240)04-00022-02-en
19 I/NET Features TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
19.3 I/NET Point Extensions
I/NET point extensions allow you to add pre-defined special functions to I/NET points. Not all point extensions are available for every I/NET point type. The following table shows the general function of each extension, and the point types which may use that extension.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Table 19.4: I/NET Point Extensions
Point Extension
DescriptionI/NET Point
Types
Alarm Inhibit Prevents nuisance alarms that may occur when a piece of equipment is off.
AI, DA, DM, GI
Calculation Defines calculations on points to expand the capability of the controller or provide information that cannot be obtained from a sensor.
All point types
Consumption Directs the accumulated value of a PI point to a particular con-sumption cell for storage. Also zeroes the value stored in the DCU for the PI point at midnight.
PI
Demand Control
Monitors PI points for electrical power consumption, predicts demand, and maintains daily and monthly power consumption totals. Includes load shedding capability (ability to control points off). Not available on 7750, 7770, 7780, or 7791 con-trollers
PI
Elevator Sets access parameters for elevators. May only be used for door points (bit offset BB 08 or 09) defined as elevators. Each elevator will have associated DO (floor relay) and DI (floor selection button) points. This extension is only available in the 7791 DPI, 7793 MCI and 7798 I/SITE LAN
DO
Event Definition
Specifies a certain condition (event) and the response that con-dition initiates (event action or event sequence). Events are limited to specific point types.
All point types
Lighting Control
Controls lighting points by zone. Lighting control may be a cycle or a time schedule. This extension is only available in the 7780 DLCU.
DO
Override Billing
Allows you to use the 7750 Building Manager, with dial-in access, to control points residing in other controllers. This extension is only available in the 7750 DCU.
DO
Runtime Defines runtime parameters for a discrete point (input or out-put) so that runtime information can be collected for Docu-trend SevenTrends reports.
DC, DI, DO
212 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 19 I/NET Features
Temperature Control Controls output points managing HVAC units. Also provides optimized start/stop, night setback/setup control, and demand temperature override control.
DC, DO
Trend Sampling
Sets parameters for recording data from this point for graphs or Docutrend SevenTrends plots.
All point types
Time Scheduling
Controls output points according to the schedule entered. DC, DO
Table 19.4: I/NET Point Extensions (Contd.)
Point Extension
DescriptionI/NET Point
Types
TAC AB, Sept 2007 213 (240)04-00022-02-en
19 I/NET Features TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
19.3.1 Edit an I/NET Point Extension
TAC Vista Workstation provides an HTML-based point extension edi-tor for adding and editing two kinds of I/NET point extensions: time schedules (for DO and DC points only) and trend samples.
If your configuration of Vista Workstation includes the I/NET host tool, you also have the option ofadding and editing any type of I/NET point extension using I/NET’s point extension editors.
To edit an I/NET point extension
1 In the folder pane, locate the desired I/NET system point. Expand each branch of the I/NET point until the point type portion of the point is visible. See Section 19.2, “I/NET Points”, on page 201 for an example.
2 If you are editing a time schedule or trend sample extension, you can use the point’s Time Schedule or Trend Configuration HTML page, respectively. Alternatively, you can launch I/NET’s point extension editor for all types of point extensions.
If necessary, refer to Section 19.2.5, “Using Point-specific Fea-tures”, on page 207, for general instructions.
3 If the point extension that you are attempting to edit has not already been added to the selected point, you will receive a mes-sage asking if you would like to add the extension now. Click Yes to add the extension to the point.
4 In the point extension editor, use the available fields and options to edit the extension.
5 When you have finished editing the point extension, click OK.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
214 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 19 I/NET Features
19.4 I/NET Alarms, Messages, and TransactionsI/NET alarms, messages, and transaction can be viewed from within Vista Workstation. You can view these items from any alarm or event pages that may have been added to the Xenta 527’s project, or from dynamic alarm and transaction viewers that are built into Vista. The information in this section describes Vista’s dynamic viewers.
19.4.1 Viewing I/NET Alarms and Transactions
To view I/NET alarms and transactions
1 Near the top of the folder pane, locate three alarm objects (for crit-ical, priority, and routine I/NET alarms) and one transactions object.
2 Click the Critical Alarms object. Critical I/NET alarms are dis-played in Vista.
3 Click any of the other objects to view other types of alarms or transactions.
Note
• The time it takes for Vista’s dynamic alarm and transaction view-ers to open is dependant on the number of messages active in the system.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 215 (240)04-00022-02-en
19 I/NET Features TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
19.4.2 Acknowledging I/NET Alarms
To acknowledge I/NET alarms
1 In the dynamic alarm viewer, highlight one or more I/NET alarms.
2 Acknowlege the alarm(s) using any of the following methods:
• Click the Acknowledge icon ( ) in the toolbar.
• Press F9.
• Right-click on any highlighted alarm and select Acknowl-edge.
3 Verify that the selected alarm(s) change to an acknowledged state in the alarm viewer.
19.4.3 Purging I/NET Alarms
To purge I/NET alarms
1 In the dynamic alarm viewer, highlight one or more I/NET alarms.
2 Purge the alarm(s) using either of the following methods:
• Click the Purge icon ( ) in the toolbar.
• Right-click on any highlighted alarm and select Purge.
3 Confirm that you wish to purge the selected alarm(s). Select Yes to confirm one alarm at a time, or select Yes to All to confirm all selected alarms.
4 Verify that the selected alarm(s) are purged from the alarm viewer.
216 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 19 I/NET Features
19.4.4 Filtering Alarms
To filter alarms
1 On the toolbar, click Filter ( ).
2 In the Alarm Filter dialog box, click appropriate tab and specify your filter options.
3 Click OK.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 217 (240)04-00022-02-en
19 I/NET Features TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
218 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
REFERENCE
20 Trend Log Profiles
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 20 Trend Log Profiles
20 Trend Log Profiles
20.1 Temperature per hour
This profile is used for logging indoor or outdoor temperatures once an hour.
Logging will start immediately after you have finished the trend log wizard, and will continue to log the temperature once an hour at the same time. The log is a circular one that logs the values for 106 weeks, before starting over.
A trend chart is created which displays the logged temperature.
Fig. 20.1: Log Profile: Temperature per hour
TrendLog
TrendChart
Thermometer
TAC AB, Sept 2007 221 (240)04-00022-02-en
20 Trend Log Profiles TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
20.2 Average Temperature per day
This profile is used for creating an average temperature for each day (24 hours).
Logging will start immediately after you have finished the trend log wizard, and will continue to log the temperature once an hour at the same time. The log is a circular one that logs the values for 106 weeks, before starting over.
A trend log calculations is created to save the average day temperature.
A trend chart is created which displays the average daily temperature.
Fig. 20.2: Log Profile: Average Temperature per day
TrendLog
Trend LogCalculation
Thermometer
TrendChart
222 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 20 Trend Log Profiles
20.3 Heating per 24 hours (before midnight)
This profile is used for logging heating (energy usage) once a day (24 h).
The profile is intended for logging the usage of the current day, and log-ging takes place 5 minutes to midnight. The log is a circular one that logs the values for 106 weeks, before starting over. The daily values are stored in the trend log.
A trend log calculation is created to save the usage per month.
No trend chart is automatically created.
Fig. 20.3: Log Profile: Heating per 24 hour (before midnight)
00015893
TrendLog
Trend LogCalculation
HeatingMeter
TAC AB, Sept 2007 223 (240)04-00022-02-en
20 Trend Log Profiles TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
20.4 Heating per 24 hours (after midnight)
This profile is used for logging heating (energy usage) once a day (24 h).
The profile is intended for logging the usage of the previous day, and logging takes place 5 minutes past midnight. The log is a circular one that logs the values for 106 weeks, before starting over.
To ensure the logged value is stored on the correct day, a trend log cal-culation object is also used. A second trend log calculation is used to save the usage per month.
No trend chart is automatically created.
Fig. 20.4: Log Profile: Heating per 24 hours (after midnight)
00015893
TrendLog
Trend LogCalculation
HeatingMeter
224 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 20 Trend Log Profiles
20.5 Electricity per hour
This profile is used for logging the hourly consumption of electricity.
Logging will start immediately after you have finished the trend log wizard, and will continue to log the usage of electricity once an hour at the same time. The log is a circular one that logs the values for 106 weeks, before starting over.
A trend chart is created which displays the logged usage.
Fig. 20.5: Log Profile: Electricity per hour
00015893
TrendLog
TrendChart
ElectricityMeter
TAC AB, Sept 2007 225 (240)04-00022-02-en
20 Trend Log Profiles TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
20.6 Electricity per 24 hours (before midnight)
This profile is used for logging electricity consumption (energy usage) once a day (24 h).
The profile is intended for logging the usage of the current day, and log-ging takes place 5 minutes to midnight. The log is a circular one that logs the values for 106 weeks, before starting over.
The daily values are stored in the trend log. A trend log calculation is created to save the usage per month.
No trend chart is automatically created.
Fig. 20.6: Log Profile: Electricity per 24 hours (before midnight)
00015893
TrendLog
Trend LogCalculation
ElectricityMeter
226 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 20 Trend Log Profiles
20.7 Electricity per 24 hours (after midnight)
This profile is used for logging electricity consumption (energy usage) once a day (24 h).
The profile is intended for logging the usage of the previous day, and logging takes place 5 minutes past midnight. The log is a circular one that logs the values for 106 weeks, before starting over.
To ensure the logged value is stored on the correct day, a trend log cal-culation object is also used. A second trend log calculation is used to save the usage per month.
No trend chart is automatically created.
Fig. 20.7: Log Profile: Electricity per 24 hours (after midnight)
00015893
TrendLog
Trend LogCalculation
ElectricityMeter
TAC AB, Sept 2007 227 (240)04-00022-02-en
20 Trend Log Profiles TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
20.8 Water per 24 hours (before midnight)
This profile is used for logging water consumption (usage) once a day (24 h).
The profile is intended for logging the usage of the current day, and log-ging takes place 5 minutes to midnight. The log is a circular one that logs the values for 106 weeks, before starting over.
The daily values are stored in the trend log. A trend log calculation is created to save the usage per month.
No trend chart is automatically created.
Fig. 20.8: Log Profile: Water per 24 hours (before midnight)
00015893
TrendLog
Trend LogCalculation
WaterMeter
228 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 20 Trend Log Profiles
20.9 Water per 24 hours (after midnight)
This profile is used for logging water consumption (usage) once a day (24 h).
The profile is intended for logging the usage of the previous day, and logging takes place 5 minutes past midnight. The log is a circular one that logs the values for 106 weeks, before starting over.
To ensure the logged value is stored on the correct day, a trend log cal-culation object is also used. A second trend log calculation is used to save the usage per month.
No trend chart is automatically created.
Fig. 20.9: Log Profile: Water per 24 hours (after midnight)
00015893
TrendLog
Trend LogCalculation
WaterMeter
TAC AB, Sept 2007 229 (240)04-00022-02-en
20 Trend Log Profiles TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
20.10 Carbon Dioxide (CO2) every 10 minutes
This profile is used for the level of carbon dioxide (CO2). Logging will start immediately after you have finished the trend log wizard, and will continue to log the level of carbon dioxide every 10 minutes.
A trend chart is created which displays the logged carbon dioxide level.
Fig. 20.10: Log Profile: Carbon Dioxide every 10 minutes
00015893
TrendLog
TrendChart
CO2Meter
230 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 20 Trend Log Profiles
20.11 Log a Generic Value every 10 Minutes
This profile is for logging a generic value (that is any value) every 10 minutes.
The log is a circular one that logs the values for 8 weeks, before starting over. A trend chart is created which displays the logged values from the trend log.
Fig. 20.11: Log Profile: Log a Generic Value every 10 minutes
00015893
TrendLog
TrendChart
Log Point
TAC AB, Sept 2007 231 (240)04-00022-02-en
20 Trend Log Profiles TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
232 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual Index
IndexAalarm
disable 67icon 39interlock 68interlock, remove 80print 71purge 71view events 64view signal tripping the alarm 65
alarm statesin alarms list 59in disabled alarms list 77
Alarm View (menu) 28alarms 57
acknowledge 60alarms list
activate from the alarm icon 39alarm states 59filter 65resize column 60select colors 74select columns 75update 60
alarms paneopen 58
Cchange value 145
enter electronic signature 150column
choose in list 41hide 42move in list 41–42resize in events list 126resize in the alarms list 60resize in the disabled alarms list 78select in events list 134select in object view 148select in the disabled alarms list 84show 42
customizemain menu 29
Ddial-up communication 195
monitor a dial-up connection in progress 196disabled alarm
enable disabled 79open the disabled alarms pane 76view events 82
disabled alarms listalarm states 77print 81resize column 78select colors 83select column 84
drag and drop 37
Eelectronic signature
enter when changing a value 150event
view details 127Event View (menu) 28events 125
view for an alarm 131view for an object 130weekly 183yearly (****) 183
events listfilter 128find a text in 132print 132refresh 126resize column 126select column 134view events for an alarm 131view events for an object 130
events paneopen 126
FFile (menu) 28folders pane 24
Ggraphics 85
change a value in 92create an online chart for a value 93
TAC AB, Sept 2007 233 (240)04-00022-02-en
Index TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
navigate 85open 90open attached notes 97print 98scroll 96search 88view events for a value 93view trend chart for a value 94zoom in 95zoom out 95
Graphics (menu) 28
HHelp (menu) 28history
back 36forward 36
hyperlink 103open 103
II/NET alarm 215
acknowledge 216filter 217purge 216view 215
I/NET host tool 197I/NET licenses 197I/NET message 215I/NET point 201
controll 208extension, edit 214extensions 212select 206set point’s message routing parameter 210view 205
I/NET pointstypes 201
I/NET time schedule 192independent 192master 192schedule types 192slave 192tagging a day as temporary 194
I/NET transaction 215view 215
I/NET trend chartview 119
I/NET trend sample 178add 178delete 180edit 180open 178
interlock for an alarmremove 80
Kkeyboard shortcuts 38
Llinked objects
open in alarms list 63local server 47log in
local Vista Server (currently logged-in Windows user) 53
local Vista Server (Vista user) 50remote Vista Server (currently logged-in Windows
user) 54remote Vista Server (Vista user) 51remote Vista Server (Windows user) 55
log out 56logged values
view in a trend chart 172view on a trend page 172view trend log as a table 171
Mmain menu 28main menu, customize 29main shortcut menu 31main toolbar 30menu
add command 43Alarm View 28create 43Event View 28File 28Graphics 28Help 28Objects 28Online Chart 28show full contents without a delay 29Tools 28Trend Chart 28View 28Window 28
menu bar 24mode
change 56
Nnotes 99
edit 101open 100
234 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual Index
print 102
Oobject view
select column 148value, change 149view value 146
Objects (menu) 28online chart 153
add value to 156create 154create from alarms list 72create from status watch pane 143delete 158edit 157open 155print 158
Online Chart (menu) 28
Ppanes 24, 32
buttons 32close 33display a hidden pane 33hide 33move 33unhide 33
password, change (Vista user) 52program settings
load my program settings 45reset program settings 45save my program settings 45
Rremote server 47report 121
open 122print 124
report copyopen 123
Ssearch 135
device 136object 136
search pane 24shortcut menu, main 31shortcuts, keyboard 38standby mode 50
activate 56status bar 25, 35status watch pane 141
activate value in 142add object to 141add value to 141change a value 152deactivate value in 142online chart, create 143remove object from 144remove value from 144view trend chart 144view value 151
TTAC Vista Server
start 48stop 48
TAC Vista Workstationstart 48stop 48
TAC Xenta Server 47TAC Xenta time chart
add an event 188delete an event 190edit an event 189open 187replace with a central time chart 191
taskbar 24time chart 181
add an event 184central time chart 181delete an event 186edit an event 185global time charts 181local time charts 181open 182overview 183TAC Xenta time charts 181
time schedulesover midnight 181
title bar 24, 26toolbar 24
add command 43create 43
toolbar, main 30Tools (menu) 28tools menu
add command 44trend chart 105
add trend log to 108create 106delete 114edit 110open 107print 115
TAC AB, Sept 2007 235 (240)04-00022-02-en
Index TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
view 111, 170view edited value 117view estimated value 117view event 116view for an alarm 73view from status watch pane 144view logged values 172
Trend Chart (menu) 28trend log
create from alarms list 72view logged values as a table 171
trend log profiles 170, 221trend log values
check edited 176copy to Microsoft Excel 173edit 175print 174
trend log wizardcreate Vista Server trend log 161create Xenta trend log 166
trend logging 159trend log wizard 160
trend pageview logged values 172
Uuser interface 23
customize 40
VView (menu) 28view value 145
object view 146Vista Server trend log
create, using the wizard 161
WWindow (menu) 28window buttons 27window menu 27windows 25, 34
buttons 34navigating 35resize 35
workspace 24
XXenta Server page 152Xenta trend log
create, using the wizard 166
236 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual Index
TAC AB, Sept 2007 237 (240)04-00022-02-en
Index TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
238 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
Copyright © 2007, TAC ABAll brand names, trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Information con-tained within this document is subject to changewithout no-tice. All rights reserved.
04-00022-02-en
Europe / Headquarters Malmö, Sweden +46 40 38 68 50
Americas Dallas, TX +1 972-323-1111
Asia-Pacific Sydney, Australia +61 2 9700 1555
www.tac.comLast Manual Page
-
Contents
-
Table of Contents
-
Bookmarks
Quick Links
High Security Systems
Technical Manual
Summary of Contents for TAC Vista
-
Page 1
High Security Systems Technical Manual… -
Page 3
High Security Systems Technical Manual… -
Page 4
Copyright © 2006 TAC AB. All rights reserved. This document, as well as the product it refers to, is only intended for licensed users. TAC AB owns the copyright of this document and reserves the right to make changes, additions or deletions. TAC AB assumes no responsibility for possible mistakes or errors that might appear in this document. -
Page 5: Table Of Contents
2.1.1 TAC Xenta Protection………………..2.1.2 Functional Description ………………..User’s Guide for System Configuration Setting up Windows Accounts in TAC Vista…………Setting up Access Control Protection of Objects in the TAC Vista Database TAC AB, Nov 2006 5 (20) 04-00007-01-en…
-
Page 6
Contents High Security Systems, Technical Manual 6 (20) TAC AB, Nov 2006 04-00007-01-en… -
Page 7: About This Manual
If you discover errors and/or unclear descriptions in this manual, please contact your TAC representative. Note We are continuously improving and correcting our documentation. This manual may have been updated. Please check our Docnet site at www.tac.com for the latest version. TAC AB, Nov 2006 7 (20) 04-00007-01-en…
-
Page 8: Typographic Conventions
Alerts you to supplementary information that is not essential to the completion of the task at hand. Advanced Alerts you that the following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access. 8 (20) TAC AB, Nov 2006 04-00007-01-en…
-
Page 9: Basic Demands
System Topology and Configuration The system requires a Windows domain controller to administer users and user groups. TAC Vista Server TAC Vista Server Supervising the Log Logging in the Secure server…
-
Page 10
The server should be scheduled to create these backup files on a write-only medium such as a CD-ROM. A stand-alone TAC Vista and Server can be installed on the server to view the backups made. TAC Vista database objects that are critical to the requirements of data security during data logging, should be protected from being changed by the users of TAC Vista. -
Page 11: Tac Xenta Protection
OP panel. There is no way of altering the log data stored in the TAC Xenta. Even though the service menu in the OP panel is protected by a password, it is recommended that this menu should be disabled to ensure a higher level of security.
-
Page 12
Being able to store data from eight days in the Xenta makes it possible to recover a failure in the Vista server that stores the data. Having two Vista servers enables them to monitor each other’s operation. A Xenta unit failure is reported as an offline alarm in Vista. -
Page 13: User’s Guide For System Configuration
«PlantTAC\VistaFieldManagers» «PlantTAC\VistaUsers» Users belonging to the «PlantTAC\VistaAdministrators» group admin- ister the security of the TAC Vista database. At least one user must be created and belong to this group. It is assumed that one of these users is called «PlantTAC\VistaAdmin».
-
Page 14
11 Click OK. Finally, start the TAC Vista Server by clicking Start button. 12 Repeat the steps above on the TAC Vista Slave computer as well and set up the TAC Vista network between the computers. 14 (20) -
Page 15: Setting Up Windows Accounts In Tac Vista
«Domain Admins»). The TAC Vista administra- tive domain account needs only to be an administrator on the computers where TAC Vista server is running (that is belonging to the local group «Administrators» and to the group «Domain Users»).
-
Page 16
3 User’s Guide for System Configuration High Security Systems, Technical Manual 16 (20) TAC AB, Nov 2006 04-00007-01-en… -
Page 17: Setting Up Access Control Protection Of Objects In The Tac Vista Database
High Security Systems, Technical Manual4 Setting up Access Control Protection of Objects in the TAC Vista Database Setting up Access Control Protection of Objects in the TAC Vista Database The user and user group objects as well as most other global objects are automatically protected by the «$ADMINISTRATORS»…
-
Page 18
4 Setting up Access Control Protection of Objects in the TAC Vista Database High Security Systems, Technical Man- 18 (20) TAC AB, Nov 2006 04-00007-01-en… -
Page 20
Copyright © 2006, TAC AB Europe / Headquarters All brand names, trademarks and registered trademarks are Malmö, Sweden the property of their respective owners. Information con- +46 40 38 68 50 tained within this document is subject to changewithout no- tice.
<strong>TAC</strong> <strong>Vista</strong> © IV Работа с <strong>TAC</strong> <strong>Vista</strong> <strong>Workstation</strong>
- Page 3 and 4: TAC Vista © IV Работа с TAC
- Page 5 and 6: TAC Vista IV, Работа с TAC V
- Page 7 and 8: TAC Vista IV, Работа с TAC V
- Page 9 and 10: TAC Vista IV, Работа с TAC V
- Page 11: 1 Введение ВВЕДЕНИЕ
- Page 14 and 15: 1 Введение TAC Vista IV, Р
- Page 16 and 17: 1 Введение TAC Vista IV, Р
- Page 18 and 19: 1 Введение TAC Vista IV, Р
- Page 20 and 21: 1 Введение TAC Vista IV, Р
- Page 22 and 23: 1 Введение TAC Vista IV, Р
- Page 24 and 25: 16 Функции времени 17
- Page 26 and 27: 2 Интерфейс пользов
- Page 28 and 29: 2 Интерфейс пользов
- Page 30 and 31: 2 Интерфейс пользов
- Page 32 and 33: 2 Интерфейс пользов
- Page 34 and 35: 2 Интерфейс пользов
- Page 36 and 37: 2 Интерфейс пользов
- Page 38 and 39: 2 Интерфейс пользов
- Page 40 and 41: 2 Интерфейс пользов
- Page 42 and 43: 2 Интерфейс пользов
- Page 44 and 45: 2 Интерфейс пользов
- Page 46 and 47: 2 Интерфейс пользов
- Page 48 and 49: 3 Запуск и останов TA
- Page 50 and 51: 3 Запуск и останов TA
- Page 52 and 53:
4 Подключение и отк
- Page 54 and 55:
4 Подключение и отк
- Page 56 and 57:
4 Подключение и отк
- Page 58 and 59:
4 Подключение и отк
- Page 60 and 61:
5 Аварии TAC Vista IV, Раб
- Page 62 and 63:
5 Аварии TAC Vista IV, Раб
- Page 64 and 65:
5 Аварии TAC Vista IV, Раб
- Page 66 and 67:
5 Аварии TAC Vista IV, Раб
- Page 68 and 69:
5 Аварии TAC Vista IV, Раб
- Page 70 and 71:
5 Аварии TAC Vista IV, Раб
- Page 72 and 73:
5 Аварии TAC Vista IV, Раб
- Page 74 and 75:
5 Аварии TAC Vista IV, Раб
- Page 76 and 77:
5 Аварии TAC Vista IV, Раб
- Page 78 and 79:
5 Аварии TAC Vista IV, Раб
- Page 80 and 81:
5 Аварии TAC Vista IV, Раб
- Page 82 and 83:
5 Аварии TAC Vista IV, Раб
- Page 84 and 85:
5 Аварии TAC Vista IV, Раб
- Page 86 and 87:
5 Аварии TAC Vista IV, Раб
- Page 88 and 89:
5 Аварии TAC Vista IV, Раб
- Page 90 and 91:
5 Аварии TAC Vista IV, Раб
- Page 92 and 93:
5 Аварии TAC Vista IV, Раб
- Page 94 and 95:
6 Мнемосхемы TAC Vista IV
- Page 96 and 97:
. 6 Мнемосхемы TAC Vista
- Page 98 and 99:
6 Мнемосхемы TAC Vista IV
- Page 100 and 101:
6 Мнемосхемы TAC Vista IV
- Page 102 and 103:
6 Мнемосхемы TAC Vista IV
- Page 104 and 105:
6 Мнемосхемы TAC Vista IV
- Page 106 and 107:
6 Мнемосхемы TAC Vista IV
- Page 108 and 109:
6 Мнемосхемы TAC Vista IV
- Page 110 and 111:
6 Мнемосхемы TAC Vista IV
- Page 112 and 113:
7 Описания TAC Vista IV, Р
- Page 114 and 115:
7 Описания TAC Vista IV, Р
- Page 116 and 117:
8 Диаграммы трендов
- Page 118 and 119:
8 Диаграммы трендов
- Page 120 and 121:
8 Диаграммы трендов
- Page 122 and 123:
8 Диаграммы трендов
- Page 124 and 125:
8 Диаграммы трендов
- Page 126 and 127:
8 Диаграммы трендов
- Page 128 and 129:
9 Отчеты TAC Vista IV, Раб
- Page 130 and 131:
9 Отчеты TAC Vista IV, Раб
- Page 132 and 133:
9 Отчеты TAC Vista IV, Раб
- Page 134 and 135:
10 События TAC Vista IV, Р
- Page 136 and 137:
10 События TAC Vista IV, Р
- Page 138 and 139:
10 События TAC Vista IV, Р
- Page 140 and 141:
10 События TAC Vista IV, Р
- Page 142 and 143:
10 События TAC Vista IV, Р
- Page 144 and 145:
10 События TAC Vista IV, Р
- Page 146 and 147:
10 События TAC Vista IV, Р
- Page 148 and 149:
10 События TAC Vista IV, Р
- Page 150 and 151:
11 Поиск TAC Vista IV, Раб
- Page 152 and 153:
11 Поиск TAC Vista IV, Раб
- Page 154 and 155:
11 Поиск TAC Vista IV, Раб
- Page 156 and 157:
12 Наблюдение стату
- Page 158 and 159:
12 Наблюдение стату
- Page 160 and 161:
12 Наблюдение стату
- Page 162 and 163:
12 Наблюдение стату
- Page 164 and 165:
12 Наблюдение стату
- Page 166 and 167:
13 Просмотр/изменен
- Page 168 and 169:
13 Просмотр/изменен
- Page 170 and 171:
13 Просмотр/изменен
- Page 172 and 173:
13 Просмотр/изменен
- Page 174 and 175:
14 Интерактивные ди
- Page 176 and 177:
14 Интерактивные ди
- Page 178 and 179:
14 Интерактивные ди
- Page 180 and 181:
14 Интерактивные ди
- Page 182 and 183:
14 Интерактивные ди
- Page 184 and 185:
15 Регистрация пара
- Page 186 and 187:
15 Регистрация пара
- Page 188 and 189:
15 Регистрация пара
- Page 190 and 191:
15 Регистрация пара
- Page 192 and 193:
15 Регистрация пара
- Page 194 and 195:
15 Регистрация пара
- Page 196 and 197:
15 Регистрация пара
- Page 198 and 199:
16 Функции времени TA
- Page 200 and 201:
16 Функции времени TA
- Page 202 and 203:
16 Функции времени TA
- Page 204 and 205:
16 Функции времени TA
- Page 206 and 207:
16 Функции времени TA
- Page 208 and 209:
16 Функции времени TA
- Page 210 and 211:
16 Функции времени TA
- Page 212 and 213:
17 Модемная связь TAC
- Page 215 and 216:
TAC Vista IV, Работа с TAC V
- Page 217 and 218:
TAC Vista IV, Работа с TAC V
- Page 219 and 220:
TAC Vista IV, Работа с TAC V
- Page 221 and 222:
TAC Vista IV, Работа с TAC V
- Page 223 and 224:
TAC Vista IV, Работа с TAC V
- Page 225 and 226:
TAC Vista IV, Работа с TAC V
- Page 227 and 228:
TAC Vista IV, Работа с TAC V
- Page 229 and 230:
TAC Vista IV, Работа с TAC V
- Page 232:
TAC helps people feel and function
TAC Vista WorkstationOperating Manual
TAC Vista WorkstationOperating Manual
Copyright © 2007 TAC AB. All rights reserved.
This document, as well as the product it refers to, is only intended for licensed users. TAC AB owns the copyright of this document and reserves the right to make changes, additions or deletions. TAC AB assumes no responsibility for possible mistakes or errors that might appear in this document.
Do not use the product for other purposes than those indicated in this document.
Only licensed users of the product and the document are permitted to use the document or any information therein. Distribution, disclosure, copying, storing or use of the product, the information or the illustrations in the document on the part of non-licensed users, in electronic or mechanical form, as a recording or by other means, including photo copying or information storage and retrieval systems, without the express written permission of TAC AB, will be regarded as a violation of copyright laws and is strictly prohibited.
Trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual Contents
Contents
INTRODUCTION
1 About this Manual 131.1 Structure ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 131.2 Typographic Conventions ……………………………………………………………………………… 141.3 Prerequisites ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 141.4 Terminology………………………………………………………………………………………………… 151.4.1 Database Terminology ……………………………………………………………………………….. 151.4.2 Network Terms and Concepts……………………………………………………………………… 17
GETTING STARTED
2 User Interface 232.1 The User Interface………………………………………………………………………………………… 232.2 Main Window………………………………………………………………………………………………. 262.2.1 Title Bar …………………………………………………………………………………………………… 262.2.2 Standard Microsoft Windows Menu and Buttons…………………………………………… 272.2.3 Main Menu……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 282.2.4 Customizing the Main Menu……………………………………………………………………….. 292.2.5 Main Toolbar…………………………………………………………………………………………….. 302.2.6 Main Shortcut Menu ………………………………………………………………………………….. 312.2.7 Panes Overview…………………………………………………………………………………………. 322.2.8 Using Panes………………………………………………………………………………………………. 332.2.9 Windows Overview……………………………………………………………………………………. 342.2.10 Status Bar …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 352.3 Using the History Buttons ……………………………………………………………………………… 362.4 Drag and Drop in TAC Vista Workstation ………………………………………………………. 372.5 Keyboard Shortcuts ………………………………………………………………………………………. 382.6 Alarm Icon on the System Tray ……………………………………………………………………… 392.7 Customizing the User Interface………………………………………………………………………. 402.7.1 Customizing Overview ………………………………………………………………………………. 402.7.2 Choosing and Moving Columns in a List ……………………………………………………… 412.7.3 Creating a New Menu and Adding Commands ……………………………………………… 432.7.4 Creating a New Toolbar and Adding Commands …………………………………………… 432.7.5 Adding a New Command to the Tools Menu ………………………………………………… 442.8 Program Settings for TAC Vista Workstation ………………………………………………….. 45
3 Starting or Stopping TAC Vista Server/Workstation 473.1 TAC Vista Server/Workstation Overview ……………………………………………………….. 473.2 Starting TAC Vista Server …………………………………………………………………………….. 483.3 Stopping TAC Vista Server …………………………………………………………………………… 48
TAC AB, Sept 2007 5 (240)04-00022-02-en
Contents TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
3.4 Starting TAC Vista Workstation …………………………………………………………………….. 483.5 Stopping TAC Vista Workstation …………………………………………………………………… 48
4 Logging in and Logging out 494.1 Logging in, Logging out and Standby Mode…………………………………………………….. 494.2 Logging in as a Vista User …………………………………………………………………………….. 504.2.1 Logging in to a Local Vista Server (Vista User)…………………………………………….. 504.2.2 Logging in to a Remote Vista Server (Vista User) …………………………………………. 514.2.3 Changing Your Password (Vista User) …………………………………………………………. 524.3 Logging in as a Windows User ………………………………………………………………………. 534.3.1 Logging in to a Local Vista Server (Currently Logged-in Windows User) ………… 534.3.2 Logging in to a Remote Vista Server (Currently Logged-in Windows User)……… 544.3.3 Logging in to a Remote Vista Server (Windows User)……………………………………. 554.4 Logging Out…………………………………………………………………………………………………. 564.5 Activating Standby Mode………………………………………………………………………………. 564.6 Change Mode……………………………………………………………………………………………….. 56
5 Alarms 575.1 Alarms Overview………………………………………………………………………………………….. 575.1.1 Opening the Alarms Pane……………………………………………………………………………. 585.1.2 Alarm States in the Alarms List …………………………………………………………………… 595.1.3 Updating the Alarms List ……………………………………………………………………………. 605.1.4 Resizing Columns in the Alarms List……………………………………………………………. 605.1.5 Acknowledging Alarms………………………………………………………………………………. 605.1.6 Opening Linked Objects……………………………………………………………………………… 635.1.7 Viewing Events for an Alarm………………………………………………………………………. 645.1.8 Viewing the Signal Tripping the Alarm ………………………………………………………… 655.1.9 Filtering the Alarms List …………………………………………………………………………….. 655.1.10 Disabling Alarms……………………………………………………………………………………….. 675.1.11 Interlocking an Alarm ………………………………………………………………………………… 685.1.12 Purging an Alarm ………………………………………………………………………………………. 715.1.13 Printing the Alarms List ……………………………………………………………………………… 715.1.14 Creating an Online Chart…………………………………………………………………………….. 725.1.15 Creating a Trend Log …………………………………………………………………………………. 725.1.16 Viewing a Trend Chart for an Alarm ……………………………………………………………. 735.1.17 Selecting Colors for the Alarms List …………………………………………………………….. 745.1.18 Selecting Columns in the Alarms List…………………………………………………………… 755.2 Disabling Alarms………………………………………………………………………………………….. 765.2.1 Opening the Disabled Alarms Pane………………………………………………………………. 765.2.2 Alarm States in the Disabled Alarms List ……………………………………………………… 775.2.3 Resizing Columns in the Disabled Alarms List ……………………………………………… 785.2.4 Enabling Disabled Alarms…………………………………………………………………………… 795.2.5 Removing Interlock for an Alarm ………………………………………………………………… 805.2.6 Printing the Disabled Alarms List ………………………………………………………………… 815.2.7 Viewing Events for a Disabled Alarm ………………………………………………………….. 825.2.8 Selecting Colors for the Disabled Alarms List……………………………………………….. 835.2.9 Selecting Columns in the Disabled Alarms List …………………………………………….. 84
6 Graphics 856.1 Graphics Overview……………………………………………………………………………………….. 856.2 Navigate Graphics ………………………………………………………………………………………… 85
6 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual Contents
6.3 Searching for Graphics………………………………………………………………………………….. 886.4 Opening a Graphic ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 906.5 Changing a Value in a Graphic ………………………………………………………………………. 926.6 Viewing Events for a Value in a Graphic ………………………………………………………… 936.7 Creating an Online Chart for a Value in a Graphic……………………………………………. 936.8 Viewing a Trend Chart for a Value in a Graphic ………………………………………………. 946.9 Zooming in and out of a Graphic ……………………………………………………………………. 956.10 Scrolling a Graphic ………………………………………………………………………………………. 966.11 Opening an Attached Notes Object…………………………………………………………………. 976.12 Printing a Graphic ………………………………………………………………………………………… 98
7 Notes 997.1 Notes Overview……………………………………………………………………………………………. 997.2 Opening a Notes Object ………………………………………………………………………………… 1007.3 Editing a Notes Object ………………………………………………………………………………….. 1017.4 Printing a Notes Object …………………………………………………………………………………. 102
8 Hyperlink 1038.1 Hyperlink Overview……………………………………………………………………………………… 1038.2 Opening a Hyperlink Object ………………………………………………………………………….. 103
9 Trend Charts 1059.1 Trend Charts Overview …………………………………………………………………………………. 1059.2 Creating a Trend Chart………………………………………………………………………………….. 1069.3 Opening a Trend Chart………………………………………………………………………………….. 1079.4 Adding Trend logs to an Open Trend Chart……………………………………………………… 1089.5 Editing a Trend Chart……………………………………………………………………………………. 1109.6 Viewing a Trend Chart………………………………………………………………………………….. 1119.7 Deleting a Trend Chart………………………………………………………………………………….. 1149.8 Printing a Trend Chart…………………………………………………………………………………… 1159.9 Viewing Events from Trend Chart ………………………………………………………………….. 1169.10 Viewing Estimated and Edited Values…………………………………………………………….. 1179.11 Viewing an I/NET Trend Chart………………………………………………………………………. 119
10 Reports 12110.1 Reports Overview…………………………………………………………………………………………. 12110.1.1 Reports …………………………………………………………………………………………………….. 12110.1.2 Report Copies……………………………………………………………………………………………. 12110.2 Opening a Report …………………………………………………………………………………………. 12210.3 Opening a Report Copy…………………………………………………………………………………. 12310.4 Printing a Report ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 124
11 Events 12511.1 Events Overview ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 12511.2 Opening the Events Pane ………………………………………………………………………………. 12611.3 Refreshing the Events List …………………………………………………………………………….. 12611.4 Resizing Columns in the Events List ………………………………………………………………. 12611.5 Viewing an Event in Detail ……………………………………………………………………………. 12711.6 Filtering Events in the Events List ………………………………………………………………….. 12811.7 Viewing Events for an Object ………………………………………………………………………… 13011.8 Viewing Events for an Alarm ………………………………………………………………………… 13111.9 Finding a Text in the Events List ……………………………………………………………………. 132
TAC AB, Sept 2007 7 (240)04-00022-02-en
Contents TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
11.10 Printing the Events List …………………………………………………………………………………. 13211.11 Selecting Columns in the Events List………………………………………………………………. 134
12 Searching 13512.1 Search Overview ………………………………………………………………………………………….. 13512.2 Searching for Objects/Devices ……………………………………………………………………….. 136
13 Status Watch 14113.1 Status Watch Overview …………………………………………………………………………………. 14113.2 Adding Objects/Values to the Status Watch Pane……………………………………………… 14113.3 Deactivating/Activating Values in the Status Watch Pane………………………………….. 14213.4 Creating an Online Chart……………………………………………………………………………….. 14313.5 Using the Create Trend Log Wizard ……………………………………………………………….. 14413.6 Viewing a Trend Chart ………………………………………………………………………………….. 14413.7 Removing Objects/Values from the Status Watch Pane …………………………………….. 144
14 Viewing/Changing Values 14514.1 Viewing/Changing Values Overview………………………………………………………………. 14514.2 Viewing Values in the Object View………………………………………………………………… 14614.3 Selecting Columns in the Object View ……………………………………………………………. 14814.4 Changing a Value in the Object View……………………………………………………………… 14914.5 Enter an Electronic Signature when Changing a Value ……………………………………… 15014.6 Viewing Values in the Status Watch Pane ……………………………………………………….. 15114.7 Changing a Value in the Status Watch Pane …………………………………………………….. 15214.8 Xenta Server Pages Overview ………………………………………………………………………… 15214.8.1 Help for the Xenta Server Pages ………………………………………………………………….. 152
15 Online Charts 15315.1 Online Charts Overview ………………………………………………………………………………… 15315.2 Creating an Online Chart……………………………………………………………………………….. 15415.3 Opening an Online Chart……………………………………………………………………………….. 15515.4 Adding Values to an Open Online Chart………………………………………………………….. 15615.5 Editing an Online Chart…………………………………………………………………………………. 15715.6 Deleting an Online Chart……………………………………………………………………………….. 15815.7 Printing an Online Chart………………………………………………………………………………… 158
16 Trend Logging 15916.1 Trend Logging Overview ………………………………………………………………………………. 15916.1.1 Trend Logging…………………………………………………………………………………………… 15916.1.2 The Trend Log Wizards ……………………………………………………………………………… 16016.2 Creating a Vista Server Trend Log Using the Create Trend Log Wizard ……………… 16116.3 Creating a Xenta Trend Log Using the Create Trend Log Wizard ………………………. 16616.4 Trend Log Profiles………………………………………………………………………………………… 17016.4.1 Using the Trend Log Profiles ………………………………………………………………………. 17016.5 Viewing a Trend Chart ………………………………………………………………………………….. 17016.6 Viewing Logged Values in a Trend Log as a Table …………………………………………… 17116.7 Viewing Logged Values in a Trend Chart………………………………………………………… 17216.8 Viewing Logged Values on a Trend Page………………………………………………………… 17216.9 Copying Trend Log Values to Microsoft Excel ………………………………………………… 17316.10 Printing Trend Log Values …………………………………………………………………………….. 17416.11 Editing Trend Log Values ……………………………………………………………………………… 17516.12 Checking Edited Trend Log Values ………………………………………………………………… 176
8 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual Contents
16.13 I/NET Trend Samples …………………………………………………………………………………… 17816.13.1 Adding/opening an I/NET Trend Sample ……………………………………………………… 17816.13.2 Editing an I/NET Trend Sample ………………………………………………………………….. 18016.13.3 Deleting an I/NET Trend Sample ………………………………………………………………… 180
17 Time Functions 18117.1 Time Charts Overview ………………………………………………………………………………….. 18117.2 Time Charts …………………………………………………………………………………………………. 18217.2.1 Opening a Time Chart………………………………………………………………………………… 18217.2.2 Overviewing a Time Chart………………………………………………………………………….. 18317.2.3 Adding an Event in a Time Chart ………………………………………………………………… 18417.2.4 Editing an Event in a Time Chart…………………………………………………………………. 18517.2.5 Deleting an Event in a Time Chart……………………………………………………………….. 18617.3 TAC Xenta Time Charts ……………………………………………………………………………….. 18717.3.1 Opening a TAC Xenta Time Chart ………………………………………………………………. 18717.3.2 Adding an Event in a TAC Xenta Time Chart……………………………………………….. 18817.3.3 Editing an Event in a TAC Xenta Time Chart ……………………………………………….. 18917.3.4 Deleting an Event in a TAC Xenta Time Chart ……………………………………………… 19017.3.5 Replacing a TAC Xenta Time Chart with a Central Time Chart………………………. 19117.4 I/NET Time Schedule …………………………………………………………………………………… 19217.4.1 I/NET Time Schedule ………………………………………………………………………………… 192
18 Dial-up Communication 19518.1 Dial-Up Communication Overview ………………………………………………………………… 19518.2 Monitoring a Dial-Up Connection in Progress …………………………………………………. 196
19 I/NET Features 19719.1 The I/NET Host Tool ……………………………………………………………………………………. 19719.1.1 I/NET Host Tool Overview…………………………………………………………………………. 19719.1.2 I/NET Licenses …………………………………………………………………………………………. 19719.1.3 Launch the I/NET Host Tool ………………………………………………………………………. 20019.2 I/NET Points………………………………………………………………………………………………… 20119.2.1 I/NET Points Overview………………………………………………………………………………. 20119.2.2 I/NET Point Types …………………………………………………………………………………….. 20119.2.3 Viewing I/NET Points………………………………………………………………………………… 20519.2.4 Selecting an I/NET Point ……………………………………………………………………………. 20619.2.5 Using Point-specific Features ……………………………………………………………………… 20719.2.6 Controlling an I/NET Point…………………………………………………………………………. 20819.2.7 Setting a Point’s Message Routing Parameters………………………………………………. 21019.3 I/NET Point Extensions…………………………………………………………………………………. 21219.3.1 Edit an I/NET Point Extension…………………………………………………………………….. 21419.4 I/NET Alarms, Messages, and Transactions …………………………………………………….. 21519.4.1 Viewing I/NET Alarms and Transactions……………………………………………………… 21519.4.2 Acknowledging I/NET Alarms ……………………………………………………………………. 21619.4.3 Purging I/NET Alarms ……………………………………………………………………………….. 21619.4.4 Filtering Alarms ………………………………………………………………………………………… 217
REFERENCE
20 Trend Log Profiles 22120.1 Temperature per hour ……………………………………………………………………………………. 221
TAC AB, Sept 2007 9 (240)04-00022-02-en
Contents TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
20.2 Average Temperature per day ………………………………………………………………………… 22220.3 Heating per 24 hours (before midnight) …………………………………………………………… 22320.4 Heating per 24 hours (after midnight) ……………………………………………………………… 22420.5 Electricity per hour ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 22520.6 Electricity per 24 hours (before midnight) ……………………………………………………….. 22620.7 Electricity per 24 hours (after midnight) ………………………………………………………….. 22720.8 Water per 24 hours (before midnight) ……………………………………………………………… 22820.9 Water per 24 hours (after midnight) ………………………………………………………………… 22920.10 Carbon Dioxide (CO2) every 10 minutes …………………………………………………………. 23020.11 Log a Generic Value every 10 Minutes……………………………………………………………. 231
Index 233
10 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
INTRODUCTION
1 About this Manual
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 1 About this Manual
1 About this ManualThis manual describes a particular process. For information on certain products, we refer you to the manual for the product in question.
For information on how to install software, we refer you to the instruc-tions delivered with the software.
If you discover errors and/or unclear descriptions in this manual, please contact your TAC representative.
1.1 StructureThe manual is divided into the following parts:
• Introduction The Introduction section contains information on how this manual is structured and how it should be used to find information in the most efficient way.
• Getting Started The Getting Started section contains a step-by-step description of how to engineer or carry out the tasks described in this manual.
• Reference The Reference section contains more comprehensive information about various parts of the Getting Started section. It also provides you with information on alternative solutions not covered by the Getting Started section.
Note
• We are continuously improving and correcting our documenta-tion. This manual may have been updated.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 13 (240)04-00022-02-en
1 About this Manual TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
1.2 Typographic ConventionsThroughout the manual the following specially marked texts may occur.
1.3 PrerequisitesThis document is intended for users with basic computer skills includ-ing a working knowledge of Microsoft Windows, Microsoft Word and Microsoft Excel. It is also beneficial that the user is familiar with using a web browser.
! Warning
• Alerts you that failure to take, or avoid, a specific action might result in physical harm to you or to the hardware.
Caution
• Alerts you to possible data loss, breaches of security, or other more serious problems.
Important
• Alerts you to supplementary information that is essential to the completion of a task.
Note
• Alerts you to supplementary information.
Tip
• Alerts you to supplementary information that is not essential to the completion of the task at hand.
Advanced
• Alerts you that the following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
14 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 1 About this Manual
1.4 Terminology
1.4.1 Database Terminology
Term Description
Database A database is a form of digital archive for stor-ing information. A database can have many lev-els of information, usually in the form of a tree with branches, sub branches and objects.
Root A database always has a top level, also known as the root or root level.
Branch A branch is a sublevel of the database contain-ing subbranches and leaves.
Examples of branches:
• A branch can be a folder that contains a number of subfolders and objects, where each subfolder contains a number of sub-folders and or objects.
• A branch can also be a Vista Server, with a LonWorks network, containing a number of Xenta Groups and Xenta Devices, where each Xenta device contains applica-tions and signals.
Folder A folder in a Vista database is a type of branch that can contain other folders (subfolders) and objects. In a previous version of Vista, folders were known as Logical Units, but this term is no longer used.
Device In a Vista database, the term Device refers to communication ports, networks and control devices (for example Xenta devices) and so on. A network can contain other devices, for exam-ple group devices. A control device normally contains applications, modules, signals, and trend logs and so on. In a previous version of Vista, Devices were known as Physical Units, but this term is no longer used.
Object In a Vista database, objects can for example be; graphics, signals, shortcuts, reports, trend logs and so on. Objects may be created beneath the Vista Server object, devices and folders.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 15 (240)04-00022-02-en
1 About this Manual TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
Shortcut A shortcut refers to another object in the Vista database. A shortcut called. “Temperature Set-point” can, for example, refer to an analog input in a Xenta device.
• Primary Shortcut. The first shortcut cre-ated for another object is known as the pri-mary shortcut. It is a protected object that cannot be deleted without changing the authority settings for the object. This is to prevent the removal of a primary shortcut by mistake.
Global objects Global objects are objects that have settings affecting a whole Vista system.Global objects are stored in the root of the Vista database and are visible on all Vista Servers in a Vista net-work/system. Changes to global objects are communicated by the Master Vista Server throughout a Vista network/system.
Properties The properties refers to the properties (attributes) for the devices, folders and objects in the Vista database.
Each object has a number of properties for example the value of the object, the description of the object and so on.
The properties are displayed in a dialog box or a specially designed dialog box. To see the properties of an object, right-click the object in the object view and then click Properties.
• Description. This is a property that all objects in the Vista database has. The description property should be used for entering information describing the object.
Term Description
16 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 1 About this Manual
1.4.2 Network Terms and Concepts
Term Description
Site The term Site refers to the buildings and equipment controlled/managed by TAC equipment/devices and systems, for example Xenta and Vista.
Network A network is a number of nodes forming a common connection.
Examples of networks:
• A LonWorks network consisting of Xenta Groups, Xenta Devices and LonWorks Devices.
• A computer network formed by connecting a num-ber of computers. There are two generic types of computer networks:
Local Area Network (LAN). A LAN is a network containing a number of nodes, for example Vista serv-ers, that are connected within a limited area. A typical example of a LAN is a network of computers in an office building. The network may vary in size from just a few computers to several hundred of them, depend-ing on the kinds of transmission media used.
Wide Area Network (WAN). A WAN consists of computers spread over a wide area where the connec-tions are not necessarily permanent. In fact, these often use dial-up connections. Several LANs may be con-nected to a WAN using a modem, router, or the like. Any type of media can be used for communicating on this type of network.
Node This is a generic term for a connection in a network.
Examples:
• A computer in a computer network
• An Xenta device in a LonWorks network.
Computer or PC.
Every computer, or PC, is identified by a name. This computer can be the PC in your room or a server, for example a network server, a web server or a Vista Server. A computer usually forms part of a domain.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 17 (240)04-00022-02-en
1 About this Manual TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
Server The term Server can refer to server software. for exam-ple a network server, a Vista Server or a Xenta Server. But often, it also refers to the computer running the server software.
• Vista Server. A computer running the Vista Server software is referred to as a Vista Server and repre-sented by a Vista Server object in the Vista data-base. A Vista Server object has the same name that the computer has in Windows. The Vista Server object contains the site network and devices that are connected to that particular Vista Server.
For example:
VistaSRV_1 (Vista Server) ACME_Inc (LonWorks Network)
1ST_Floor (TAC Xenta Group) Conf_Room (TAC Xenta)
• Local Vista Server or Local Server.Vista Server is referred to as a Local Vista Server or a Local Server, if running on the same computer as the one where you are running Vista Workstation.
• Remote Vista Server or Remote Server. Vista Server is referred to as a Remote Vista Server or a Remote Server, if running on another computer than the one where you are running Vista Worksta-tion.
• Master Vista Server or Master. In a Vista net-work/system containing several Vista Servers, one of the Vista Servers is the Master Vista Server, managing and communicating system-specific information and global settings throughout the Vista network/system
• Slave Vista Server or Slave. The Slave Vista Servers in a Vista system receive system-specific information and global settings from the Master in the Vista network/system.
• Xenta Server. A Xenta 500/700/913 can act as a Xenta Server in Vista for a LonWorks network, an I/NET network, a MicroNet network, and/or third party networks, such as Modbus. The Xenta Server serves Vista with all the information avail-able on those networks.
Term Description
18 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 1 About this Manual
Client The term Client can refer to client software, for exam-ple a web browser, Vista Workstation, that communi-cates with server software, for example a web server, or a Vista Server. But often, it also refers to the com-puter running the client software. Other examples of clients are Vista Webstation and Vista ScreenMate.
• Vista Workstation. A computer running the Vista Workstation software is referred to as a Vista Workstation.
Domain Networks are usually divided into smaller areas known as domains. Domains contain a number of users, groups and computers. They are defined by the system managers of the network. When logging on to the net-work, you also specify the network domain you wish to enter. Each domain has a domain controller, which supervises users logging on to the domain by checking that the correct password is used.
User Group
Users are divided into groups by system managers. These groups are created in order to group together users who are to have the same level rights and author-ity in the network. A user can be a member of more than one group.
User, User Account or Account
As a user of a network or system, you receive a user account from the system managers of the network or system. A user account has a user name and a pass-word, which are used to identify you when logging in.
Term Description
TAC AB, Sept 2007 19 (240)04-00022-02-en
1 About this Manual TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
20 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
GETTING STARTED
2 User Interface3 Starting or Stopping TAC Vista
Server/Workstation4 Logging in and Logging out5 Alarms6 Graphics7 Notes8 Hyperlink9 Trend Charts
10 Reports11 Events12 Searching13 Status Watch14 Viewing/Changing Values15 Online Charts16 Trend Logging17 Time Functions18 Dial-up Communication19 I/NET Features
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 2 User Interface
2 User Interface
2.1 The User Interface
Tip
• Use the mouse to point at the image to see tooltips containing the names of different parts of the Vista Workstation User Interface.
Fig. 2.1: Overview of the Vista Workstation Interface
TAC AB, Sept 2007 23 (240)04-00022-02-en
2 User Interface TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
The Taskbar in Microsoft Windows
1 Taskbar.
The taskbar is usually displayed at the bottom of the desktop in Windows.
The taskbar displays:
Start button. The Start button opens the start menu which is used for starting programs and managing Windows.
Taskbar buttons. Each program running in Windows has a button on the taskbar, unless the program is running as a service.
Status area. The status area is farthest to the right of the taskbar. Some programs and functions in Windows display icons in the sta-tus area.
The TAC Vista Workstation Main Window
The main window for Vista Workstation contains:
2 Title Bar. At the top a of every window, you will find the title bar. The title bar for Vista Workstation contains the following informa-tion:
• Program icon. Clicking on the program icon opens the Win-dow menu.
• Name of the Vista Server.
• Name of the user currently logged into the Vista Server.
• The standard Windows buttons.
Menu bar. The main menu for Vista Workstation is located on the menu bar, which is located immediately underneath the title bar.
Toolbar. Located immediately underneath the menu bar, the main toolbar provides access to the main features and the panes in Vista Workstation.
3 Workspace. The main window, in which the panes and windows in Vista Workstation are displayed, is viewed inside the workspace (gray background).
Panes. Panes are special types of windows that can be attached to the inner edge of the main window and hidden from view. These panes have their own toolbars, shortcut menus, and/or buttons.
4 The folders pane and the search pane is by default displayed as panes attached to left inner side of the main window.
24 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 2 User Interface
5 The following panes, are by default attached to the lower inner side of the main window:
• Alarms
• Disabled Alarms
• Events
• Search Result 1
• Search Result 2
6 The status watch pane is by default attached to the right inner side of the main window.
Windows. The windows of Vista Workstation are used to display the contents and objects from the Vista database.
Some of the windows have their own toolbars and shortcut menus. They also have the standard window buttons, for example Minimize, Maxi-mize, Restore, and Close.
7 The following types of windows can be displayed in the main win-dow of Vista Workstation:
• object view
• graphics
• online charts
• trend charts
• alarm view
• event view
8 Status bar. The status bar contains information about the state/progress of the current action or request. For instance, if a dial-up connection is attempting to be connected, the status bar will dis-play the current connection status.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 25 (240)04-00022-02-en
2 User Interface TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
2.2 Main Window
2.2.1 Title Bar
In the title bar, the name of the current program is displayed (that is Vista Workstation). The title bar also displays the user name of the per-son currently logged into the system.
The name of the user and the computer will be displayed using the fol-lowing format, <user name>@<computer>, for example
TAC Vista Workstation — Logged in: JOHNADAMS@PC105
In addition, the title bar also displays information about the path to the location in the database that you have selected, while browsing the data-base using the folders pane or the object view.
26 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 2 User Interface
2.2.2 Standard Microsoft Windows Menu and Buttons
In Windows, windows can be moved and resized using the mouse. In every window a menu and buttons are also available, to manage the size of the window and to close the window/program.
The Window Menu
The Window menu is activated by clicking the program icon on the title bar in the upper left corner (left side of the title bar).
The Window Buttons
The Window buttons are to be found on the title bar in the upper right corner of a window.
Command Comment
Restore Restores a maximized window to its previous size.
Move Used to move the window.
Size Used to set the size of the window.
Minimize Minimizes the window, displaying only a task-bar button on the taskbar.
For windows within Vista Workstation, a mini-mized window is displayed on the background of the main window.
Maximize Maximizes the window, to the maximum size allowed on the desktop.
For windows within Vista Workstation, the window is maximized to the visible size of the background of the main window.
Close (ALT+F4) Closes the Vista Workstation.
For panes and windows within Vista Worksta-tion, this command closes the window.
Next (CTRL+F6) This command will only be available if the pro-gram has more than one window open in the main window. The command selects the next open window.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 27 (240)04-00022-02-en
2 User Interface TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
2.2.3 Main Menu
The menus on the main menu
The following menus are always available on the main menu:
• File
• View
• Tools
• Window – This menu is only available when one or more win-dows are open in the main windows of Vista Workstation.
• Help
The other menus in the main menu are only available when a specific type of window is the active one in the main window of Vista Worksta-tion. This applies to the following menus.
Tips
• Toggling commands in the View menu:
• The commands for the panes (folders, search, alarms, events, dis-abled alarms and status watch) are toggling commands.
• This means that the first time you click the command for a pane, the pane will open. The next time you click the command, the pane will close.
• The icons for the open panes are displayed with a frame around them, both in the View menu and on the main toolbar of Vista Workstation.
Menu Active Window
Alarm View Alarm view
Event View Event view
Objects Object view
Graphics Graphic
Online Chart Online chart
Trend Chart Trend chart
28 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 2 User Interface
2.2.4 Customizing the Main Menu
To customize the main menu
Not all commands are displayed at the same time in the menus of Vista Workstation.Some commands are hidden and the most recently used commands are displayed first in the menus. This is in compliance with a feature introduced by Microsoft which limits how much is displayed in menus.
If you wish to see the full content of a menu, click the button, or point to a menu and wait for all the remaining commands to appear.
If you want to see the full content of the menus at all times, you can change a setting in Vista Workstation that will enable the menus to be fully displayed.
To show the full contents of the menus without a delay
1 Right-click the menu bar, and then click Customize.
2 In the Customize dialog box, click the Options tab.
3 Clear Menus show recently used commands first.
4 Click OK.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 29 (240)04-00022-02-en
2 User Interface TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
2.2.5 Main Toolbar
The main toolbar contains some of the commands available in the main menu of Vista Workstation. The main toolbar is also referred to as the standard toolbar.
Log in
Log out
Operating / Engineering
Folders
Search
Alarms
Events
Disabled Alarms
Status Watch
Back
Forward
Cascade Windows
Tile Vertically
Tile Horizontally
Help
30 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 2 User Interface
2.2.6 Main Shortcut Menu
The main shortcut menu contains some of the commands available in the main menu of Vista Workstation.
Folders
Search
Alarms
Events
Disabled Alarms
Status Watch
Search Result 1
Search Result 2
Standard Toolbar
Customize
TAC AB, Sept 2007 31 (240)04-00022-02-en
2 User Interface TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
2.2.7 Panes Overview
In Vista Workstation, the following windows are referred to as panes:
• Folders
• Search
• Search Result 1
• Search Result 2
• Alarms
• Events
• Disabled Alarms
• Status Watch
The panes are attached to the inner edge of the main window. They can be activated from the main menu, the main toolbar or the shortcut menu.
A pane can be moved from its position and attached to another edge of the main window. Panes attached to the edge of the main window can be stacked on each other, displaying a tab for each pane.
Panes can be hidden, displayed only as tabs along the edge of the main window. Pointing or clicking on the tab of a hidden pane displays it. Hiding panes provides more space for the other windows in Vista Workstation, for example graphics, object view and so on.
Buttons available for the panes
/ . Auto Hide. These are the buttons for hiding or unhiding the pane.
Close. This is the button for closing the pane.
32 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 2 User Interface
2.2.8 Using Panes
To move a pane
1 Grab the title bar (upper edge) of pane you wish to move, using the left mouse button.
2 Drag the pane to a new position at the inner edge of the main win-dow.
To hide a pane
1 In the upper right corner of the pane, click Auto Hide .
2 The pane becomes hidden, displayed only as a tab along the inner edge of the main window. If the pane was stacked together with other panes, all the panes are hidden, displaying a tab for each pane.
To display a hidden pane
1 Point to or click the tab for the hidden pane, at the edge of the main window.
2 The hidden pane will be displayed, and when you click some-where else it becomes hidden again.
To unhide a pane
1 Point on the tab of the hidden pane, at the edge of the main win-dow.
2 In the upper right corner of the window, click Auto Hide .
3 The pane becomes attached to the edge of the main window. If there is more than one tab, all the hidden panes will be displayed with one tab for each one.
To close a pane
• In the upper right corner of the pane, click Close .
TAC AB, Sept 2007 33 (240)04-00022-02-en
2 User Interface TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
2.2.9 Windows Overview
The following windows in Vista Workstation are referred to as win-dows:
• Object View
• Graphics
• Online Charts
• Trend Charts
• Alarm View
• Event View
By default, all windows are only displayed in one instance each. If you choose to use the Open in New Window command, several instances of each type of window can be displayed at the same time.
Buttons available for the windows
Each window has its own tab. The tabs are displayed below the menu bar in Vista Workstation. The tabs have the following buttons:
When the windows are maximized, the following buttons appear in the upper right corner of the menu bar, just below the same type of buttons for the main window in Vista Workstation:
For displaying tabs to the left of the current tab.
For displaying tabs to the right of the current tab.
For closing the current window.
For minimizing the current window.
For restoring the windows to their previous size.
For closing the current window.
34 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 2 User Interface
Navigating and resizing windows
2.2.10 Status Bar
The status bar is located at the bottom of the main window of Vista Workstation. You can switch it on/off in the View menu, and it contains the following information:
• In the left corner, texts explaining commands on the main menu or the shortcut menus are displayed.
• In the middle, the number of matches in the most recent search result is displayed.
• In the right corner, information about the progress of any dial-up communication is displayed, using icons and text.
Tips
Alternate method of maximizing a window:
• Double-click the title bar of the window to maximize it.
Using the window tabs to navigate between windows:
• Use the arrow keys to browse the window tabs, and then click the tab for the window you want to see.
Using keyboard shortcuts to navigate between windows:
• To go to the next window, press CTRL+F6.
• To go to the previous window, press SHIFT+CTRL+F6
TAC AB, Sept 2007 35 (240)04-00022-02-en
2 User Interface TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
2.3 Using the History ButtonsVista Workstation remembers the order in which windows are opened/selected and the main toolbar has icons for going back and forward through the history of the program.
To go back
• If Back on the main toolbar is green, click Back to go one step back to the previously selected window or graphic.
• If Back is unavailable, then you have reached the beginning of the history of the program.
To go forward
• If Forward on the main toolbar is green, click Forward to go one step forward to the next selected window or graphic.
• If Forward is unavailable, then you have reached the end of the history for of program.
Tips
You can also use the keyboard to go back and forward in the program history.
• To go back, press ALT+LEFT ARROW on your keyboard.
• To go forward, press ALT+RIGHT ARROW on your keyboard.
36 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 2 User Interface
2.4 Drag and Drop in TAC Vista WorkstationDrag and Drop means to select one or more objects/points/folders by holding down the left mouse button and dragging (moving) the mouse pointer to a target and then dropping by releasing the left mouse button.
Drag and drop can be used to move or to copy and paste folders/objects/points.
Caution
• Avoid renaming, moving or deleting objects/shortcuts in the Vista Database that are used/referred to by other objects/short-cuts.
• Before deciding to move, rename or delete an object/shortcut, verify that the object/shortcut does not have any references to other objects that might cause a problem if you move, rename or delete the object/shortcut.
• If you move or rename an object/shortcut included in a graphic, the graphic will not be able to display the value/information from that object/shortcut.
• If you move, rename or delete an object/shortcut used in an online chart, the chart will not able to display the value of the object/shortcut.
• If you move, rename or delete an object/shortcut used in an trend log, the trend log will not able to log the value of the object/shortcut. Any trend log calculation using the trend log will fail. Any trend chart or Report using the trend log or a trend log calculation based on the trend log, will also fail to display/report data.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 37 (240)04-00022-02-en
2 User Interface TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
2.5 Keyboard ShortcutsVista Workstation supports the following keyboard shortcuts:
Press To
CTRL+A Select all rows in a list
CTRL+C Copy
CTRL+INSERT Copy
CTRL+drag item Copy
CTRL+X Cut
SHIFT+DELETE Cut
Drag item Move (cut and paste)
CTRL+SHIFT+V Paste as Shortcut
CTRL+SHIFT+drag item Copy and Paste as Shortcut
DELETE Delete
CTRL+E Edit
CTRL+F Search
CTRL+N New
CTRL+O Open
CTRL+SHIFT+O Open in new window
CTRL+P Print
CTRL+R References
CTRL+S Save my program settings
F1 Opens the Help
F2 Rename
F3 Search
CTRL+F4 Quit window
ALT+F4 Quit Vista Workstation
F5 Refresh
CTRL+F6 Next window
CTRL+SHIFT+F6 Previous window
38 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 2 User Interface
2.6 Alarm Icon on the System TrayThe status area is to be found on the right-hand side of the taskbar in Windows. The taskbar is usually displayed at the bottom of the desktop in Windows.
The status area normally displays the clock and icons for programs run-ning in Windows. Vista Workstation displays an alarm icon in the status area.
Placing the mouse pointer on the alarm icon displays a tool tip contain-ing the name of the computer and the number of unacknowledged alarms in the alarms list.
To activate the alarms list from the alarm icon
• In the status area, double-click the alarm icon.
If Vista Workstation is minimized, the program will open. If the alarms pane is not already displayed, Vista Workstation will display it.
F9 Acknowledge alarm
F11 Full screen mode
SHIFT+F10 Activate shortcut menu
ALT+RIGHT ARROW Forward
ALT+LEFT ARROW Back
Press To
Tip
Alternate method:
• In the status area, right-click the alarm icon, and then click Alarms.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 39 (240)04-00022-02-en
2 User Interface TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
2.7 Customizing the User Interface
2.7.1 Customizing Overview
The user interface of Vista Workstation can be customized to add new menus and toolbars, define shortcut keys, remove/re-arrange the tools menu and so on. To customize the user interface, use the Customize dialog box.
Activate the Customize dialog box, by right-clicking the menu bar and clicking Customize.
The Customize dialog box contains the following tabs:
• Commands. This tab is used for viewing and adding commands to the main menu. You can also add and remove new menus, and select commands from the Commands tab.
• Toolbars. This tab is used for changing and adding toolbars.
• Tools. This tab is used for defining the tools available in the tools menu.
• Keyboard. This tab is used for defining shortcut keys for com-mands in Vista Workstation.
• Menu. This tab is used for the main menu and shortcut menu set-tings.
• Options. This tab is used for displaying/hiding tooltips and/or shortcut key information about the toolbars, and for showing/hid-ing commands on the main menu.
The Reset my usage data button in the Options tab, is used for reset-ting a counter for the most commonly used commands in the menus.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
40 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 2 User Interface
2.7.2 Choosing and Moving Columns in a List
This instruction applies to lists in the following panes and windows:
• The alarms pane and the alarm view windows
• The disabled alarms pane
• The events pane and the event view windows
• The status watch pane
• The search result 1 and search result 2 panes
• The object view window, when displayed as a detailed list.
To choose and move columns in a list
1 Right-click any column header and a dialog box is displayed.
2 In the Select Columns tab choose the columns to display by selecting a the columns and clicking Show or Hide. You can also choose columns by selecting or clearing the check mark before each column.
3 To rearrange the order of the columns in the list, select a column in the list and click Move Up or Move Down.
4 When you have finished choosing and/or rearranging columns, click OK.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 41 (240)04-00022-02-en
2 User Interface TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
Tips
You can also show/hide and move columns directly in the list using the mouse.
To hide columns using the mouse
1 Put the mouse pointer on the right edge of the column header. The mouse pointer should look like a single vertical line with two arrows.
2 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the column edge to edge of the column to the left of it.
3 Release the left mouse button and the column has been removed.
To show columns using the mouse
1 Put the mouse pointer just to the right of the right edge of a col-umn header. If the mouse pointer looks like a double vertical line with two arrows, then there is a hidden column to display.
2 Hold down the left mouse button and drag to the right to display the hidden column.
3 Release the left mouse button and the column will be shown.
To move columns using the mouse
1 Put the mouse pointer on a column header.
2 Hold down the left mouse button and drag the column to its new position in the list.
3 Release the mouse button to drop it on the new position in the list.
42 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 2 User Interface
2.7.3 Creating a New Menu and Adding Commands
To create a new menu and add commands
1 Right-click the menu bar, and then click Customize.
2 In the Customize dialog box, click the Commands tab.
3 In the Categories list, click New Menu.
4 Drag the new menu from the Commands list onto the menu bar in the main window.
5 Add commands new menu by selecting a category in the Categories list and then dragging a command in the Commands list onto the menu you added.
2.7.4 Creating a New Toolbar and Adding Commands
To create a new toolbar and add commands
1 Right-click the menu bar, and then click Customize.
2 In the Customize dialog box, click the Toolbars tab.
3 Click New, type a name for the toolbar and then click OK.
4 Drag the new toolbar onto the menu bar in the main window.
5 Click the Commands tab and add commands to the toolbar by selecting a category in the Categories list and then dragging a command in the Commands list onto the toolbar you added.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 43 (240)04-00022-02-en
2 User Interface TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
2.7.5 Adding a New Command to the Tools Menu
To add a new command to the Tools menu
1 Right-click the menu bar, and then click Customize.
2 In the Customize dialog box, click the Tools tab.
3 Click New (Ins) to insert a new command in the Menu contents list.
4 Type a name for the new command and press ENTER.
5 In the Command box, click the browse button to browse to the program you want to start with the new command.
6 In the Arguments box, type any arguments for the programs such as a file name to open with the selected program and/or parameters for the selected program.
7 In the Initial Directory, type the path to any directory that should be the initial (default) directory (folder) for the program you have selected.
8 Click Close.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
44 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 2 User Interface
2.8 Program Settings for TAC Vista WorkstationCommands for Program Settings
Load My Program Settings. Loads and restores the windows, panes, menus, toolbars and so on in Vista Workstation, in accordance with the user’s most recently saved program settings.
Save My Program Settings. Saves the program settings for the cur-rently logged in Vista User or Windows User, that is the settings for windows, panes, menus, toolbars and so on in Vista Workstation.
Reset Program Settings. Resets the program settings to the default set-tings for Vista Workstation. The default settings only display the folders and the alarms pane. Changes made to the main menu or toolbars are reset to their original setting.
To save my program settings
• On the File menu, click Save My Program Settings.
To load my program settings
• On the File menu, click Load My Program Settings.
To reset program settings
• On the File menu, click Reset Program Settings.
Notes
• The saved program settings only apply to the logged-in user on that particular computer.
• The next time the same user logs in on the same computer, the saved settings will be applied.
• The save settings are also applied when selecting to load pro-gram settings.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 45 (240)04-00022-02-en
2 User Interface TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
46 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 3 Starting or Stopping TAC Vista Server/Workstation
3 Starting or Stopping TAC Vista Server/Workstation
3.1 TAC Vista Server/Workstation OverviewTAC Vista Server
Vista Server is the program that manages the Vista database and com-munication with the devices and other computers in a Vista system.
From version 4.20 of Vista, it is no longer a requirement to run a copy of Vista Server on all the computers in a Vista system. Only computers connected to the devices in the system are required to run Vista Server.
Local Server – If you are running Vista Server and Vista Workstation on the same computer, then Vista Server is referred to as a Local Server.
Remote Server – If Vista Server is running on another computer than the one running Vista Workstation, it is referred to as a Remote Server.
Vista Server can run as a service in Windows.
TAC Vista Workstation
Vista Workstation is used for the day-to-day operation, engineering and administration of the Vista system.
From Vista version 4.20, it is no longer a requirement to run Vista Server and Vista Workstation on the same computer.
When logging in using Vista Workstation, you can choose to log in to a local server or a remote one.
It is also possible to run several copies of Vista Workstation, each copy logged in to a local server or a remote one.
TAC Xenta Server
Xenta Servers pages, such as graphics, trend logs, trend charts and so on, normally viewed with a web browser addressing a Xenta Server can also be viewed in Vista Workstation.
The pages are accessed in the same way as Vista Server objects.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 47 (240)04-00022-02-en
3 Starting or Stopping TAC Vista Server/Workstation TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
3.2 Starting TAC Vista ServerTo start Vista Server
• On the Start menu, point to Programs, point to TAC, point to TAC Vista Server, and then click Server.
Vista Server starts, showing a splash screen. Then Vista Server will be displayed as a minimized program on the taskbar in Windows.
3.3 Stopping TAC Vista ServerTo stop TAC Vista Server
1 On the File menu, click Exit.
2 In the dialog box that will be displayed, click Yes to confirm that you want to quit the program.
3.4 Starting TAC Vista WorkstationTo start TAC Vista Workstation
• On the Start menu, point to Programs, point to TAC, and then click TAC Vista Workstation.
Vista Workstation starts, showing a splash screen. Then the login dialog box for Vista Workstation is displayed.
3.5 Stopping TAC Vista WorkstationTo stop TAC Vista Workstation
• On the File menu, click Exit.
48 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 4 Logging in and Logging out
4 Logging in and Logging out
4.1 Logging in, Logging out and Standby ModeLogging in
When you start Vista Workstation, you are required to log in using a user name and a password in order to confirm your identity as a valid user. When you log in, you actually log in to Vista Server in order to be granted access to the data provided by a Vista Server. The user you are using in Vista Workstation grants you access to some or all of the func-tionality of the programs, depending on the authority level of your user.
Logging out
When you log out, you confirm that you do not wish to have access to Vista Workstation or data from a Vista Server.
Local or remote Vista Server
Vista Server is referred to as a Local Vista Server when running on the same computer that you are running Vista Workstation on. If Vista Server is running on another computer, then Vista Server is referred to as a Remote Vista Server.
Vista User
This refers to using Vista User created in Vista. By default, there are four accounts available; User, Field, Manager and System. The admin-istrators of the Vista system can create Vista accounts for the users of Vista.
Windows User
This refers to the user account that you use when logging into Windows. That user account can be part of one or more user groups in Windows. A Windows User in Vista is an object in the Vista database referring to a user account or a user group in Windows. This enables logging into Vista using a user from Windows.
The currently logged in Windows User refers to the user account you used when logging in to Windows on your computer.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 49 (240)04-00022-02-en
4 Logging in and Logging out TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
Standby Mode
In Standby mode, Vista Workstation data is dynamically displayed in graphics, online charts and so on, but the program is locked as regards input. There are only two buttons available to the user, Log in and Log Out. The user/operator is required to log in again to be able to have any effect on the program.
Standby Mode can be activated manually, by the user, or automatically by Vista Workstation when the user has been inactive for a few minutes. Automatic standby must be activated by the administrator, individually for each user.
4.2 Logging in as a Vista User
4.2.1 Logging in to a Local Vista Server (Vista User)
To log in to a local Vista Server
1 In the Log in to Vista Server dialog box, click Options to display other options than user name and password.
2 In the Vista Server to log in to list, click [Local Server].
3 In the User type list, click Vista User.
4 In the User name text box, type your user name.
5 In the Password text box, type your password.
6 Click OK.
50 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 4 Logging in and Logging out
4.2.2 Logging in to a Remote Vista Server (Vista User)
To log in to a remote Vista Server
1 In the Log in to Vista Server dialog box, click Options to display other options than User name and Password.
2 In the Vista Server to log in to list, enter the name of the remote server.
3 In the User type list, click Vista User.
4 In the User name text box, type your user name.
5 In the Password text box, type your password.
6 Click OK.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 51 (240)04-00022-02-en
4 Logging in and Logging out TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
4.2.3 Changing Your Password (Vista User)
To change your password (Vista User)
1 In Vista Workstation, on the File menu, click Change Password.
2 In the Old Password box, type the password currently in use.
3 In the New Password box, type the new password.
4 In the Confirm Password box, re-type the new password.
5 Click OK.
Note
• The minimum number of characters in a password is 4, and the maximum is 255.
52 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 4 Logging in and Logging out
4.3 Logging in as a Windows User
4.3.1 Logging in to a Local Vista Server (Currently Logged-in Windows User)
To log in to a local Vista Server (currently logged-in Windows user)
1 In the Log in to TAC Vista Server dialog box, click Options to display other options than User name and Password.
2 In the Vista Server to log in to box, click [Local Server].
3 In the User type box, click Currently logged-in Windows user.
4 Click OK.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 53 (240)04-00022-02-en
4 Logging in and Logging out TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
4.3.2 Logging in to a Remote Vista Server (Currently Logged-in Windows User)
To log in to a remote Vista Server (currently logged-in Windows user)
1 In the Log in to Vista Server dialog box, click Options to display other options than User name and Password.
2 In the Vista Server to log in to box, enter the name of the remote server.
3 In the User type box, click Currently logged-in Windows user.
4 Click OK.
54 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 4 Logging in and Logging out
4.3.3 Logging in to a Remote Vista Server (Windows User)
To log in to a local Vista Server
1 In the Login to TAC Vista Server dialog box, click Options to display other options than User name and Password.
2 In the Vista Server to log in to box, enter the name of the remote server.
3 In the User type box, click Windows User.
4 In the User name text box, type your user name.
5 In the Password text box, type your password.
6 Click OK.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 55 (240)04-00022-02-en
4 Logging in and Logging out TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
4.4 Logging OutTo log out from TAC Vista Workstation
• On the File menu, click Log out.
4.5 Activating Standby ModeTo activate the standby mode
• On the File menu, click Standby Mode.
4.6 Change ModeThe change mode list changes the mode of Vista between Engineering mode (offline) and Operating mode (online).
The mode is indicated on the program icon in the Windows taskbar.
• Engineering Mode
• Operating Mode
Notes
• In a Vista network with several Workstations and one or several Servers, the selection Engineering/Operating mode is now (Vista 4.3.1) done per Vista Workstation and not, as previously, globally for the network. This means that setting one Workstation in Engi-neering mode will not force the others to leave the Operating mode.
• If you exit Vista Workstation in Engineering mode and if you start Vista Workstation again, you will be prompted with “The client is set to Engineering mode. Change to Operating mode?”.
56 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
5 Alarms
5.1 Alarms OverviewWhat is an Alarm?
In Vista, alarms are handled by alarm event objects that monitor other objects, for example fans or temperatures. When certain criteria relating to the monitored object are met, the alarm will be tripped and the alarm event object will change state from Normal to Alarm.
How to Notice if an Alarm has been Tripped
When an alarm is tripped, it will be displayed as an unacknowledged alarm in the alarms list. If the alarm buzzer has been activated, a sound will also be heard.
If the alarm pane is not being displayed when an alarm is tripped, it will automatically open to display the new alarm in the alarms list.
What to do when an Alarm has been Tripped
If your task is merely supervising the system and you are not allowed to acknowledge alarms, follow your employer’s instructions as regards how to act when an alarm is tripped.
If your task is acknowledging alarms, always investigate their cause and take the necessary action to deal with them before acknowledging, dis-abling or resetting them.
In Vista Workstation, the following actions are possible:
• Acknowledge alarms.
• Disable alarms.
• Interlock alarms.
• Filter the alarms list
• View events for an alarm.
• Open linked objects.
• Print the alarms list.
• View the properties of an Alarm
In some cases, it is also possible to start an online chart and to create a trend log.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 57 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
Purge Alarms
You can purge an alarm in the alarms list, that is remove the alarm from the Vista alarm database. The alarm event in the Vista event database will remain.
5.1.1 Opening the Alarms Pane
To open the alarms pane
• On the View menu, click Alarms.
Tips
Alternate methods:
• On the main tool bar, click Alarms.
• On the Windows taskbar, in the status area, double-click the alarm icon.
• On the Windows taskbar, in the status area, right-click the alarm icon and then click Alarms.
58 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
5.1.2 Alarm States in the Alarms List
The color settings for the alarm states affect all computers in a Vista sys-tem. These are the default color settings for the different alarm states in Vista:
The following alarm states are available in the alarms list:
• Unacknowledged alarms. When an alarm is tripped, it will appear as an unacknowledged tripped alarm in the alarms list. If the alarm is reset before it has been acknowledged, this will be indicated by a (dash) at the beginning of the row in the alarms list. The row will however keep its color setting.
• Acknowledged alarms. If the alarm is acknowledged, it will change state to an acknowledged tripped alarm in the alarms list. A (check mark) at the beginning of the row also indicates that the row has been acknowledged. If an acknowledged alarm is reset, it will disappear from the alarms list.
• Reset alarm require acknowledgement. This alarm state indi-cates that, even though the alarm has been reset, you are required to acknowledge the alarm in the alarms list. This alarm state will only be available if the administrator has activated it in the $System object.
• Manually disabled alarms. This alarm state indicates that the alarm has been manually disabled, and disabled alarms are dis-played in the disabled alarms list.
• Interlocked alarms. This alarm state indicates that the alarm has been interlocked, and interlocked alarms are displayed in the dis-abled alarms list.
Unacknowledged alarms Text color: Black. Background color: Red
Acknowledged alarms Text color: Black. Background color: Green
Reset alarm require acknowledgement Text color: Black. Background color: Yellow
Manually disabled alarms Text color: Black. Background color: White
Interlocked alarms Text color: Black. Background color: Gray
TAC AB, Sept 2007 59 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
5.1.3 Updating the Alarms List
To update the alarms list
1 Click the title bar of the alarms pane to make it the active pane in Vista Workstation.
2 Press F5 to update the alarms list.
5.1.4 Resizing Columns in the Alarms List
To resize columns in the alarms list
• In the alarms pane, right-click the alarms list and then click Resize Columns.
The columns will be resized to the maximum length of the content of each columns.
5.1.5 Acknowledging Alarms
To acknowledge alarms
1 In the alarms list, select one or more unacknowledged alarms.
2 Right-click the alarm(s) and then click Acknowledge.
Tip
• Alternate method:
• Right-click the alarms list and then click Refresh.
Note
• Before acknowledging an alarm, always investigate its cause and take the appropriate action.
60 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
The alarms will be acknowledged one by one, and the alarms list updated.
Tips
Alternate methods:
• To acknowledge an alarm in the alarms list, double-click the unacknowledged alarm.
• In the alarms list, select one or more unacknowledged alarms. Press F9 to acknowledge the selected alarms.
• In the alarms list, select one or more unacknowledged alarms. On the alarms list toolbar, click Acknowledge.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 61 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
To acknowledge alarms using enforced acknowledge response
1 In the alarms list, select one or more unacknowledged alarms.
2 Right-click the alarm(s) and then click Acknowledge.
For each alarm, the Enforced Acknowledge Response dialog box is displayed.
3 In the Cause list, click a pre-defined cause.
4 In the Action list, click a pre-defined action.
5 In the Comment box, type an optional comment, and then click OK.
The alarms will be acknowledged one by one, and the alarms list updated.
Note
• If enforced acknowledge response has been activated, the opera-tor will be forced to select a cause, an action and type a com-ment, for each alarm he/she acknowledges.
62 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
5.1.6 Opening Linked Objects
To open a linked object
• In the alarms list, right-click the desired alarm, point to Linked Objects and then click the linked object you want to open.
Tips
Alternate methods:
• In the alarms list, click an alarm displaying the text “[Click to Open]” in the Linked Objects column. Click the linked object you wish to open.
• In the alarms list, select an alarm displaying the text “[Click to Open]” in the Linked Objects column. On the alarms list toolbar, click one of the icons to open a linked object.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 63 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
5.1.7 Viewing Events for an Alarm
To view events for an alarm
• In the alarms list, select an alarm, right-click and then click View Events.
A window will open with a filter activated which only displays alarm events related to the alarm you selected.
To save a temporary event view as an event view object
1 Right-click the events list, and then click Save as Event View.
2 Select where to save the event view in the Vista database.
3 In the Object name box, type a name for the event view object, and then click Save.
The event view will be saved as an event view object in the database.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
64 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
5.1.8 Viewing the Signal Tripping the Alarm
To view the signal tripping the alarm
• In the alarms list, select an alarm, right-click and then click Signal Properties.
5.1.9 Filtering the Alarms List
Normally, the alarms list displays all alarms, but it can be filtered to dis-play a subset of the alarms.
The alarms list can be filtered using one or more of the following options:
• Description
• Object ID
• Alarm text
• User
• Alarm priorities
• Alarm count
• Date and Time
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Important
• Does not apply to Xenta alarms.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 65 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
To customize a filter for the alarms list
1 Right-click a row in the alarms list, and then click Filter.
2 In the Filter dialog box, select one or more of the possible filter options.
3 Click OK
The filter will be activated and the alarms list updated.
To delete an active filter and display all the alarms
• Right-click a row in the alarms list, click All Alarms.
The alarms list will be updated, displaying all alarms.
Tips
Alternate method:
• On the alarms list toolbar, click Filter.
• For more information on the filter options, click Help in the $AlarmView dialog box.
66 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
5.1.10 Disabling Alarms
To disable alarms
1 In the alarms list, select one or more unacknowledged alarms.
2 Right-click the alarms list and then click Disable.
The alarm will change state to manually disabled and also appear in the disabled alarm list, in the disabled alarms pane.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• Before disabling an alarm, always investigate its cause and take the appropriate action.
Tips
Alternate method:
• In the alarms list, select one or more alarms.
• On the alarms list toolbar, click Disable.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 67 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
5.1.11 Interlocking an Alarm
Vista supports both logical and time-based interlocking of an alarm. Logical interlocking is controlled by a binary point, and, as long as the binary point is ON, the interlock will remain active.
Time-based interlocking is controlled by a manually set timer and is used to set a minimum time between two consecutive alarms. This is a way of preventing repeat alarms being generated when a fault occurs and is reset several times during a short period.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• Interlocking must NOT be used for dial-up devices. It is not pos-sible to check interlocking in a dial-up device during an alarm as the line is being used by the device sending the alarm.
68 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
To activate logical interlocking
1 In the alarms list, select an alarm.
2 Right-click in the alarms list, and then click Alarm Properties.
3 In the General tab, click Interlock.
4 In the Logical text box, browse to the binary point you intend to use to control the interlock.
5 Click Select.
6 Click OK.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 69 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
To activate time-based interlocking
1 In the alarms list, right-click an alarm in the alarms list, and then click Alarm Properties.
2 In the General tab, click Interlock.
3 In the Disabled for box, set the number of hours and/or minutes you want the alarm to be interlocked.
4 Click OK.
70 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
5.1.12 Purging an Alarm
To purge an alarm
1 In the alarms list, select one or more alarms.
2 Right-click the alarms list and then click Purge.
3 Click Yes or Yes to All to confirm purge.
The alarm(s) will be purged.
5.1.13 Printing the Alarms List
To print the alarms list
1 In the alarms list, right-click and then click Print.
2 The Windows Print dialog box will be displayed. Select a printer and then click OK.
The number and width of the columns will be printed as they are dis-played on the screen.To customize the number and width of the col-umns, see Chapter 5.1.18, “Selecting Columns in the Alarms List”, on page 75.
If you have activated a filter which reduces the types of alarms dis-played or which only shows alarms for a specific object, then only the alarms matching the criteria for the filter you have activated will appear in the printed list.
The paper size and orientation (portrait or landscape) are defined in the properties of the Windows Print dialog box.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Notes
• Before purging an alarm, always investigate its cause and take the appropriate action.
• The possibility to purge alarms is restricted by access rights.
Tip
Alternate method:
1 In the alarms list, select one or more alarms.
2 On the alarm list toolbar, click Purge.
3 Click Yes or Yes to All to confirm purge.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 71 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
5.1.14 Creating an Online Chart
To create an online chart
1 In the alarms list, right-click an alarm and click Start Online Chart.
2 In the online chart, right-click and then click Save.
3 In the dialog box, type a file name in the File name text box and then click Save.
For more information see Chapter 5, “Alarms”, on page 57.
5.1.15 Creating a Trend Log
To create a trend log
1 In the alarms list, right-click an alarm, point to Create Trend Log and then click either Vista Server Trend Log or Xenta Trend Log.
2 In the Trend Log Wizard, select a suitable trend log profile and then click Finish.
For more information see Chapter 16, “Trend Logging”, on page 159.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• This functionality is only available to alarms referring to an object/value displayable in an online chart.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• This functionality is only available to alarms referring to an object/value that can be logged in a trend log.
72 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
5.1.16 Viewing a Trend Chart for an Alarm
To view a Trend Chart from the Alarms pane
• In the alarms list, right-click an alarm, point to View Trend and then click the trend chart you wish to view.
A window opens displaying the trend chart you selected.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• This functionality is only available to alarms referring to an object/value that has been logged in a trend log, and the trend log is, directly or indirectly, included in one or several trend charts. Trend charts includes logged values from trend logs or trend log calculations.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 73 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
5.1.17 Selecting Colors for the Alarms List
The colors used for the alarms (rows) in the alarms list reflect the alarm states. The alarms are grouped according to the alarm states, with each alarm state having its own color setting, for both text color and back-ground color.
It is also possible to select which font to use or to disable the color set-ting. The color setting is a global setting for the Vista system, that is all computers in a Vista system will be affected by it.
To select colors for alarms
1 In the alarms pane, right-click the alarms list and then click Customize.
2 In the Alarm Customization dialog box, click the Text tab.
3 Select the colors for the alarm states (font color and background color), and then click OK.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Tip
Alternate method:
• Right-click the header of a column in the alarms list to activate the Alarm Customization dialog box.
74 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
5.1.18 Selecting Columns in the Alarms List
To select columns in the alarms list
1 In the alarms pane, right-click the alarms list and then click Customize.
2 Click the Select Column(s) the tab.
3 Select the columns to be displayed and then click OK.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Tip
Alternate method:
• Right-click the header of a column in the alarms list to activate the Alarm Customization dialog box.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 75 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
5.2 Disabling Alarms
5.2.1 Opening the Disabled Alarms Pane
To open the disabled alarms pane
• On the View menu, click Disabled Alarms.
Tip
Alternate method:
• On the main toolbar, click Disabled Alarms.
76 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
5.2.2 Alarm States in the Disabled Alarms List
The color settings of the alarm states affect all computers in a Vista sys-tem. These are the default color settings for the different alarm states in Vista:
The following alarm states are available in the disabled alarms list:
• Manually disabled events. This alarm state indicates that the alarm has been manually disabled, and disabled alarms are dis-played in the disabled alarms list.
• Interlocked events. This alarm state indicates that the alarm has been interlocked, and interlocked alarms are displayed in the dis-abled alarms list.
Manually disabled alarm events Text color: Black. Background color: White
Interlocked alarm events Text color: Black. Background color: Gray
TAC AB, Sept 2007 77 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
5.2.3 Resizing Columns in the Disabled Alarms List
To resize columns in the disabled alarms list
• In the disabled alarms pane, right-click the disabled alarms list and then click Resize Columns.
The columns will be resized to the maximum length of the contents of each columns.
78 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
5.2.4 Enabling Disabled Alarms
To enable alarms
1 In the disabled alarms list, select one or more disabled alarms.
2 Right-click the disabled alarms list and then click Enable.
The disabled alarm is removed from the disabled alarms pane, and the alarm changes color in the alarms pane.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Tip
Alternate method:
1 In the disabled alarms list, select one or more alarms.
2 On the disabled alarms list toolbar, click Enable.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 79 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
5.2.5 Removing Interlock for an Alarm
To remove interlock
1 In the alarms list, select an alarm.
2 Right-click in the alarms list, and then click Alarm Properties.
3 In the General tab, select the Not disabled option.
4 Click OK.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
80 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
5.2.6 Printing the Disabled Alarms List
To print the disabled alarms list
1 In the disabled alarms list, right-click and then click Print.
2 The Windows Print dialog box will be displayed. Select a printer and then click OK.
The columns displayed and their width will be in accordance with the settings of the disabled alarms list.
If you have activated a filter which reduces the types of alarms dis-played or which only shows alarms for a specific object, then only the alarms matching the criteria for the filter you have activated will be dis-played in the printed list.
The paper size and orientation (portrait or landscape) are defined in the properties of the Windows Print dialog box.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 81 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
5.2.7 Viewing Events for a Disabled Alarm
To view events for a disabled alarm
• In the alarms list, select a disabled alarm, right-click and then click View Events.
A window opens, with a filter activated which only displays alarm events related to the disabled alarm you selected.
To save the event view
1 Right-click the events list, and then click Save as Event View.
2 Select where to save the event view in the Vista database.
3 In the File name text box, type a name for the event view, and then click Save.
The event view will be saved as an event view object in the database.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
82 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 5 Alarms
5.2.8 Selecting Colors for the Disabled Alarms List
The colors used for the alarms (rows) in the disabled alarms list reflect the alarm states. The alarms are grouped according to the alarm states, with each alarm states having its own color setting, for both text color and background color.
It is also possible to select which font to use or to disable the color set-ting. The color setting is a global setting for the Vista system, that is all computers in a Vista system will be affected by the setting.
To select colors for alarms
1 In the disabled alarms pane, right-click the disabled alarms list and then click Customize.
2 Click the Text tab.
3 Select the colors for the alarm states (font color and background color), and then click OK.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 83 (240)04-00022-02-en
5 Alarms TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
5.2.9 Selecting Columns in the Disabled Alarms List
To select columns in the disabled alarms list
1 In the disabled alarms pane, right-click the disabled alarms list and then click Customize.
2 Click the Select Column(s) tab.
3 Select the columns to be display and then click OK.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Tip
• Alternate method:
• Right-click the header of a column in the disabled alarms list to activate the Customization of Disabled Alarms dialog box.
84 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 6 Graphics
6 Graphics
6.1 Graphics OverviewGraphics are used to navigate a site and display information about the buildings, floors, systems and subsystems of the site. Graphics display-ing systems or subsystems usually describe the process of the system using special symbols for fans, valves, temperature sensors and so on. Graphics usually also contain texts and values from the site.
When working in Operating mode in TAC Workstation, the symbols, texts or values in the graphics are dynamically updated with data from the site. Symbols may change shape or color, or start to flash to indicate that something is wrong, or that an alarm has been tripped.
Graphics can be linked together making it possible to navigate between graphics, from overview graphics, to graphics displaying information about a building, floor, room or system. When you click a link, you will move to another graphic.
6.2 Navigate GraphicsNavigation between graphics is achieved using link areas in the graphic which point to other graphics.
Tips
• If the mouse pointer passes over a link, the pointer will change to a pointing hand and a tooltip will display the Vista path to the linked graphic.
• When navigating graphics, you can also use the and icons on the main toolbar to go back and forward in the program his-tory, displaying the previous or next graphic or window.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 85 (240)04-00022-02-en
6 Graphics TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
To open a linked graphic
1 In an open graphic, click the arrow icon on the toolbar.
2 Point to a link area in the graphic and then click the left mouse button.
The linked graphic will be displayed in the current window.
86 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 6 Graphics
To open a linked graphic in a new window
1 In an open graphic, click the arrow icon on the toolbar.
2 Point to a link area in the graphic, hold down the SHIFT key and then click the left mouse button.
3 The linked graphic will be displayed in a new window.
.
Tips
Alternate methods:
• To open a linked graphic, place the mouse pointer over the link, right-click and then click Open in the shortcut menu.
• To open a linked graphic in a new window, SHIFT-click the link.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 87 (240)04-00022-02-en
6 Graphics TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
6.3 Searching for GraphicsTo search for graphics
1 In the search window, click the browse button for the Type of devices or objects box.
Open the Files branch and select Graphic – TGML and then click OK.
88 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 6 Graphics
2 In the Look in box, click the browse button, select a folder to search and then click OK. If you wish to search subunits, select the Include subunits option. If you want to limit the search to the first 1,000 items, select the Interrupt search if more than 1000 results option.
3 Click Search Now and view the result in Search Result 1.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 89 (240)04-00022-02-en
6 Graphics TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
6.4 Opening a GraphicNormally graphics are displayed in the same window. You can choose to open graphics (and other objects) in new windows, making it possible to see several graphics at the same time.
To open a graphic
1 In the folders pane, browse to the graphic you want to open.
2 In the object view, double-click the graphic to open it.
Tip
• To manually update the information in an open graphic, press the F5 key on your keyboard.
Tip
Alternate method:
• To open a linked graphic, place the mouse pointer over the link, right-click and then click Open in the shortcut menu.
90 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 6 Graphics
To open a graphic in a new window
1 In the folders pane, browse to the graphic you want to open
2 In the object view, right-click the graphic and click Open in New Window.
Tip
Alternate method:
• In the folders pane or in the object view, drag the graphic to the workspace (background) of Vista Workstation.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 91 (240)04-00022-02-en
6 Graphics TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
6.5 Changing a Value in a Graphic
If you have the required level of authority, you will be allowed to change a value in a graphic.
To change a value in a graphic
1 In an open graphic, click the arrow icon on the toolbar.
2 Point to the value you want to change in the graphic, and then click the value.
3 In the dialog box that appears, type a new value and click OK.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Tip
• If the mouse pointer passes over a value, the pointer will change to a pointing hand and a light yellow tooltip will dis-play the name and path of object.
92 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 6 Graphics
6.6 Viewing Events for a Value in a Graphic
To view events for a value in a graphic
• In an open graphic, right-click to the value and then click View Events.
A window will open with a filter activated which only displays events related to the object you selected.
To save a temporary event view as an event view object
1 Right-click the events list, and then click Save as Event View.
2 Select where to save the event view in the Vista database.
3 In the Object name text box, type a name for the event view object, and then click Save.
The event view will be saved as an event view object in the database.
6.7 Creating an Online Chart for a Value in a Graphic
To create an online chart for a value in a graphic
1 In an open graphic, right-click on a value, point to Start Online Chart and then click the value to plot.
2 In the online chart, right-click and then click Save as online chart.
3 In the Object name box type a object name.
4 Click Save.
For more information see Chapter 5, “Alarms”, on page 57.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 93 (240)04-00022-02-en
6 Graphics TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
6.8 Viewing a Trend Chart for a Value in a Graphic
To view a trend chart for a value in a graphic
• In an open graphic, right-click a value and point to View Trend and then click the trend chart you wish to view.
A window opens displaying the trend chart you selected.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• This functionality is only available to an object/value that has been logged in a trend log, and the trend log is, directly or indi-rectly, included in one or several trend charts. Trend charts includes logged values from trend logs or trend log calculations.
94 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 6 Graphics
6.9 Zooming in and out of a GraphicTo zoom in
1 Ensure that the default cursor is selected.
2 Right-click an open graphic and then click Zoom In, on the short-cut menu.
3 Place the mouse pointer over the graphic. Hold down the left mouse button and draw an area to zoom in on.
To zoom out
1 Ensure that the default cursor is selected.
2 Right-click an open graphic and then click Zoom Out, on the shortcut menu.
3 Place the mouse pointer over the graphic. Click the left mouse button to zoom out.
Tip
Alternate method:
• Hold down the CTRL key and roll the mouse wheel. Roll up to zoom in and roll down to zoom out.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 95 (240)04-00022-02-en
6 Graphics TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
6.10 Scrolling a GraphicYou will only be able to scroll a graphic, if you have zoomed in to look at a graphic in detail, or if the graphic is not being displayed in Zoom to fit mode. Scrolling means moving around in a graphic in order to see another part of it.
To scroll a graphic
1 Ensure that the default cursor is selected.
2 Right-click an open graphic and then click Scroll on the shortcut menu. The mouse pointer changes to a .
3 Place the mouse pointer over the graphic. Press down the left mouse button to grab the graphic and move the mouse to scroll the graphic.
Tips
Alternate methods:
• You can use the arrow keys and the Page Up/Page Down keys on your keyboard.
• You can place the mouse pointer anywhere in the graphic, which is not a link or an object, and hold down the left mouse button, to scroll the graphic.
96 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 6 Graphics
6.11 Opening an Attached Notes ObjectNotes are objects that normally are simple text files, but can also be other types of files. Notes is opened by the program associated to that type of file in Windows.
To open an attached notes
1 In a graphic, right-click and the click View Notes.
2 View the notes and add additional information if necessary.
Important
• This function is only available for graphics of the OGC format.
• In graphics of the TGML format, notes is opened using links/but-tons in the graphic.
Tip
Alternate method:
• On the graphics toolbar, click View Notes.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 97 (240)04-00022-02-en
6 Graphics TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
6.12 Printing a Graphic
To print a graphic
1 Ensure that the default cursor is selected.
2 Right-click an open graphic and then click Print.
3 The Windows Print dialog box of will be displayed. Select a printer and then click OK.
The paper size and orientation (portrait or landscape) are defined in the properties of the Windows Print dialog box.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
98 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 7 Notes
7 Notes
7.1 Notes OverviewA Notes object in Vista is normally a text file. Notes objects can, how-ever, be manually defined in Vista as another type of file, for example an Adobe Acrobat (.pdf) file, or a Word file (.doc).
When creating or opening notes object, a copy of the file is opened by the tool/program in Windows that is associated with that type of file. Normally, Microsoft Notepad is the associated program for text files (.txt).
It is possible to change the setting in Windows to associate *.txt files with another program, if required. See the Help or other documentation for Windows for information about this.
If any changes are made, you must first save them in the program used to display/change notes. Vista will then also ask you if you wish to save the changed file in the Vista database.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 99 (240)04-00022-02-en
7 Notes TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
7.2 Opening a Notes ObjectTo open a notes object
1 In the folders pane, browse to the folder containing the notes object you want to open.
2 In the object view, double-click the notes object to open it.
The notes object are opened by the tool/program in Windows that is associated with that type of file.
Normally Microsoft Notepad is the associated program for text files (.txt).
Note
• Notes can be opened from a graphic if a graphical object in the graphic and corresponding link for the notes object has been defined in the graphics editor. Notes can also be linked to an alarm and opened from the alarms list.
100 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 7 Notes
7.3 Editing a Notes ObjectTo edit a notes object
1 Open the notes object.
2 Edit the file in the program used to edit the file.
3 Save the file and quit the program.
After the program used to modify the file is closed, a dialog box in Vista Workstation will ask you to save the notes object.
4 Click Yes to save the notes in Vista Workstation.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 101 (240)04-00022-02-en
7 Notes TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
7.4 Printing a Notes Object
To print a notes object in Microsoft Notepad
1 On the File menu, click Print.
2 The Windows Print dialog box will be displayed. Select a printer and then click OK to print the notes.
Note
• This information concerns how to print a text file using Notepad in Windows. For further details, see the Windows Help or Microsoft Notepad.
102 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 8 Hyperlink
8 Hyperlink
8.1 Hyperlink OverviewWeb sites can be opened in Vista Workstation and Vista Webstation by the use of hyperlink objects.
8.2 Opening a Hyperlink ObjectTo open a hyperlink object
1 In the folders pane, click the folder containing the hyperlink object you want to open.
2 In the object view, double-click the hyperlink object to open it.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 103 (240)04-00022-02-en
8 Hyperlink TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
104 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 9 Trend Charts
9 Trend Charts
9.1 Trend Charts Overview
Trend charts graphically display the logged values from one or more trend logs. Trend charts can support the display of values using both a primary and a secondary y-axis.
To update the value for a trend chart, you must manually update the chart, right-click the chart and then click Refresh, or press the F5 key on the keyboard. This will force the chart to read the trend log values again.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• If you update a trend chart for a Vista system that uses dial-up communication, this may force the system to dial-up in order to retrieve the logged values.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 105 (240)04-00022-02-en
9 Trend Charts TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
9.2 Creating a Trend Chart
To create a trend chart
1 In the object view, make sure that no object is selected.
2 Right-click in the object view and point to New, then point to Object and then click Chart – Trend.
3 Type a name for the new trend chart and press ENTER.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• It is now necessary to add trend logs to the trend chart and make any necessary configurations.
106 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 9 Trend Charts
9.3 Opening a Trend Chart
To open a trend chart
1 In the folders pane, browse to the folder containing the trend chart object you want to open.
2 In the object view, double-click the trend chart to open it.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• If you open a trend chart that does not contain any trend logs the warning message “No trend log series in chart” appears. This is normal if you just created the trend chart and have not yet added any trend logs to the chart.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 107 (240)04-00022-02-en
9 Trend Charts TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
9.4 Adding Trend logs to an Open Trend Chart
To add trend logs to an open trend chart
1 On the Windows menu, click Cascade.
2 In the object view, select one or more trend logs and drag it/them to the trend chart.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
108 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 9 Trend Charts
Note
• If you drop the value into the left side of the chart, the value will be displayed using the primary y-axis. If you drop the value on the right side of the chart the value will be displayed using the secondary y-axis.
Tips
Alternate methods:
• In a open trend chart, right-click and then click Edit Trend Chart. In the dialog box displayed, click the Trend Log tab. Click Add to add a trend log.
• In an open trend chart, right-click and then click Insert Trend Log. In the Select dialog box, find and select a trend log and then click Select.
• In the object view, right-click the trend chart and then click Properties. In the dialog box displayed, click the Trend Log tab. Click Add to add a value.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 109 (240)04-00022-02-en
9 Trend Charts TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
9.5 Editing a Trend Chart
To edit a trend chart
1 In the folders pane, browse to the folder containing the trend chart object you want to edit.
2 In the object view, right-click the trend chart and then click Properties.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Tip
Alternate method:
• When a trend chart is open, click Edit Trend Chart on the Trend Chart menu.
110 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 9 Trend Charts
9.6 Viewing a Trend Chart
A trend chart can be displayed by double-clicking on the trend chart in the object view.
Trend charts can also be displayed from the alarms list, the status watch pane, a search result pane or a graphic. Simply right-click the object/value, point to View Trend and click the trend chart you wish to view.
You can right-click a point/object or a trend log and find out if the selected object is included in any trend chart, and then select to display the trend chart.
To view a trend chart from the object view
1 In the folders pane, browse to the folder containing the object you are interested in.
2 In the object view, right-click the object, point to View Trend and then click the trend chart you wish to view.
To view a trend chart from the alarms pane or an alarms view
• In the alarms pane or alarms view, right-click the alarm, point to View Trend and then click the trend chart you wish to view.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 111 (240)04-00022-02-en
9 Trend Charts TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
To view a trend chart from a search result pane
• In the search result pane, right-click the object, point to View Trend and then click the trend chart you wish to view.
To view a trend chart from the status watch pane
• In the status watch pane, right-click the object, point to View Trend and then click the trend chart you wish to view.
112 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 9 Trend Charts
To view a trend chart from a graphic
• In an open graphic, right-click a value and point to View Trend and then click the trend chart you wish to view.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 113 (240)04-00022-02-en
9 Trend Charts TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
9.7 Deleting a Trend Chart
To delete a trend chart
1 In the object view, right-click the trend chart you want to delete and then click Delete.
2 In the dialog box displayed, click Yes to confirm.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
114 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 9 Trend Charts
9.8 Printing a Trend Chart
To print a trend chart
1 Right-click an open trend chart, and click Print.
2 The Windows Print dialog box is displayed. Select a printer and click OK.
The paper size and orientation (portrait or landscape) are defined in the properties of the Windows Print dialog box.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 115 (240)04-00022-02-en
9 Trend Charts TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
9.9 Viewing Events from Trend ChartTo view events from a Trend Chart
1 Open the trend chart you want to view.
2 Right-click the trend chart area and click View Log Events.
116 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 9 Trend Charts
9.10 Viewing Estimated and Edited ValuesIf the communication between the logging point and the Vista Server is interrupted so that no values can be transferred, the values are esti-mated.
The estimated values are marked estimated in the view log dialog box and they are always the same as the last logged value.
Estimated values can be modified if they differs considerably from the actual values. (See Section 16.11, “Editing Trend Log Values”, on page 175.)
To view estimated and modified values in a trend chart
1 Open the trend chart.
2 Right-click and click Indicate Edited Values or Indicate Esti-mated Values.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 117 (240)04-00022-02-en
9 Trend Charts TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
The estimated and modified values are shown in the trend chart.
The icons in the chart indicate:
Estimated values.
Edited values.
Tip
Alternate method:
• Click the Indicate Edited Values or Indicate Estimated Values symbols in the trend chart tool bar.
118 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 9 Trend Charts
9.11 Viewing an I/NET Trend Chart
You can view I/NET trend charts that are part of the project loaded in the Xenta 527, or you can browse to an I/NET point that has a trend sampling extension and view its trend chart.
An I/NET point must already have a trend sampling extension in order for it to provide a trend chart. If you need to add a trend sampling extension to an I/NET point, refer to Section 16.13.1, “Adding/opening an I/NET Trend Sample”, on page 178 for instructions.
To view an I/NET trend chart
1 In the folder pane, expand the Xenta 527 server and locate the I/NET object.
This object is a container for I/NET points, point extensions, and configuration objects.
2 Expand the I/NET object and its underlying branches until the point type portion of the desired I/NET point is visible.
The following example shows I/NET point 55220004 DO selected in the folder pane.
3 Expand the point type portion of the I/NET point to view its avail-able HTML pages.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 119 (240)04-00022-02-en
9 Trend Charts TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
4 Click on the Trend Configuration page to view the point’s trend setup.
If necessary, you can adjust the trend setup. Refer to your I/NET Seven documentation for a detailed description of each parameter.
5 Click Graph to view the point’s trend chart.
120 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 10 Reports
10 Reports
10.1 Reports Overview
10.1.1 Reports
Reports are created using the report generator for Vista, which is an pro-gram that uses Microsoft Excel. Reports are normally saved in the Vista database as report objects.
Reports can be saved outside of the Vista database.
Reports can be run automatically using a Periodical Report object and a Time Event object to determine how often to run them.
10.1.2 Report Copies
Report copies are located in the Archive subfolder at the same location in the Vista database as the report. The Archive subfolder will have a subfolder named identical to the report were the report copies are placed.
The report copies are named according to the date and time they were saved, using the syntax <YYMMDD_hhmmss>, for example 050303_120005.
Example:
A report DatRep was opened on the 5th of May 2005 at 10:13:13 and saved as a copy. The a report copy is saved as 050505_101313 in the subfolder DatRep in the subfolder Archive.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 121 (240)04-00022-02-en
10 Reports TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
10.2 Opening a Report
To open a report
1 In the folders pane, browse to the report you want to open.
2 In the object view, double-click the report to open it.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Tip
Alternate methods:
• In the object view, right-click the report and click Open.
Note
• Reports can be opened from a graphic if it has been linked using a command point in the graphic. Reports can also be linked to an alarm and opened from the alarms list.
122 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 10 Reports
10.3 Opening a Report Copy
To open a report copy
1 In the object view, find the subfolder (logical unit) containing the report copy.
2 Double-click the report copy.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 123 (240)04-00022-02-en
10 Reports TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
10.4 Printing a Report
To print a report
1 Open the report. For more information on how to open a report, see Section 10.2, “Opening a Report”, on page 122.
2 On the File menu, click Print.
3 The Windows Print dialog box of will be displayed. Select a printer and then click OK.
The paper size and orientation (portrait or landscape) are defined in the properties of the Windows Print dialog box.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
124 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 11 Events
11 Events
11.1 Events OverviewVista Workstation automatically logs all events occurring in the Vista system. By events, we mean any action taken by the users or by the sys-tem itself.
There are four types of events:
• Alarm. This denotes events/actions in the alarms pane or disabled alarms pane. Any alarms that have been tripped or any actions taken by the user due to alarms, for example acknowledging or disabling alarms and so on, are logged as events.
• Object Change. Any changes made to objects/devices in the data-base, for example changing or renaming objects/devices, are logged as events.
• Command. Any commands executed by the system or a user are logged as events, for example logging in, logging out, creating or deleting objects/devices in the database and so on.
• Trend value changes. Modified values in a trend log.
Using the events pane, it is easy to obtain an overview of what has occurred in the system, and to track, for instance, whether a user has made changes to system settings which might be the cause of an alarm.
The database file is to be found in the EVLOG folder in the folder where Vista Workstation was installed, for example C:\Program Files\TAC\TAC Vista Workstation\EVLOG\TacEvlog-File.bak.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 125 (240)04-00022-02-en
11 Events TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
11.2 Opening the Events PaneTo open the events pane
• On the View menu, click Events.
11.3 Refreshing the Events ListTo refresh the events list
1 Click the title bar of the events pane to make it the active pane.
2 Press F5 to refresh the events list.
11.4 Resizing Columns in the Events ListTo resize columns in the events list
• In the events pane, right-click the events list and then click Resize Columns.
The columns will be resized to the maximum length of the contents of each columns.
Tip
Alternate methods:
• On the main tool bar, click Events.
Tip
Alternate method:
• Right-click the events list and then click Refresh.
126 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 11 Events
11.5 Viewing an Event in DetailTo view an event in detail
• Right-click the row (event) in the list and click Details.
The event will be displayed in the Event Details dialog box.
Use the buttons to browse to the previous or the next event in the list.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 127 (240)04-00022-02-en
11 Events TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
11.6 Filtering Events in the Events ListNormally, the events list displays all events, but the list can be filtered to display a subset of the events.
To filter the events list by event type
• Right-click a row in the events list, select or clear the commands View Alarms, View Object Changes, View Commands and/or View Trendlogs to show or hide events of the selected event types.
The events list will be updated, displaying the events according to the selected event types.
To customize a filter for the events list
1 Right-click a row in the events list, and then click Filter.
2 In the Event Filter dialog box, use the options on the tabs. Select one or more of the possible filter options and click OK.
128 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 11 Events
The filter will be activated and the events list updated.
To delete an active filter and display all events
• Right-click a row in the events list, and click All Events.
The events list is updated, displaying all events.
Tip
Alternate method:
• On the events list toolbar, click Filter.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 129 (240)04-00022-02-en
11 Events TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
11.7 Viewing Events for an ObjectTo view events for an object
• In the object view, right-click an object and then click View Events.
A window will open with a filter activated which only displays events related to the object you selected.
To save a temporary event view as an event view object
1 Right-click the events list, and then click Save as Event View.
2 Select where to save the event view in the Vista database.
3 In the Object name text box, type a name for the event view object, and then click Save.
The event view will be saved as an event view object in the database.
130 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 11 Events
11.8 Viewing Events for an AlarmTo view events for an alarm
• In the alarms list, select an alarm, right-click and then click View Events.
A window will open with a filter activated which only displays alarm events related to the alarm you selected.
To save a temporary event view as an event view object
1 Right-click the events list, and then click Save as Event View.
2 Select where to save the event view in the Vista database.
3 In the Object name text box, type a name for the event view object, and then click Save.
The event view will be saved as an event view object in the database.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 131 (240)04-00022-02-en
11 Events TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
11.9 Finding a Text in the Events ListThe Find command in the event list enables you to type a text and find any event containing that text. This function searches all columns, except the Type column.
To find a text in the events list
1 In the events list, right-click a row and then click Find.
2 In the Find dialog box, type a text in the Find what box, and click Find Next.
Any row in the events list that contains a text matching the one you typed will be selected in the list. Click Find Next to keep searching through the list.
11.10 Printing the Events ListTo view a print preview
• In the events list, right-click a row and then click Print Preview.
In the preview, you will be able to see the layout of the printed list.
The columns displayed and their width will be in accordance with the settings of the event list.
If you have activated a filter which reduces the types of events displayed or which only shows events for a specific object, then only the events
132 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 11 Events
matching the criteria for the filter you have activated will be displayed in the printed list.
To print the events
• In the events list, right-click a row and then click Print.
The Windows Print dialog box of will be displayed. Select a printer and then click OK.
The paper size and orientation (portrait or landscape) are defined in the properties of the Windows Print dialog box.
Tip
Alternate method:
• In print preview, click Print.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 133 (240)04-00022-02-en
11 Events TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
11.11 Selecting Columns in the Events ListTo select columns in the events list
1 In the events pane, right-click the events list and then click Customize.
2 Click the Select Columns tab.
3 Select the columns to be displayed and then click OK.
Tip
Alternate method:
• Right-click the header of a column in the events list to activate the Events Customization dialog box.
134 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 12 Searching
12 Searching
12.1 Search OverviewVista Workstation includes a search pane which enables you to search the database.
You can search the whole database from the top (root level) and all the branches, or you can limit your search to just one branch of the database.
When selecting criteria for searching the database, you can search among all the objects in the database or limit your search to specific types of objects or devices, for example points/signals, files and so on. You can also search for points/signals and set criteria for one of the attributes of the point/signal, for example the value attribute.
The result of the search is displayed in the search result panes. By default, search results are displayed in the search result 1 pane, but you can also choose to display them in the search result 2 pane.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Tip
• Wildcard characters * and ? are allowed when typing criteria in the Search for devices or objects named text box, in the Look in text box and when searching using a string in the Description property or the Key property (or any other property) for devices/objects.
* – represents one or more characters
? – represents one character
TAC AB, Sept 2007 135 (240)04-00022-02-en
12 Searching TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
12.2 Searching for Objects/DevicesTo search for an object or a device
1 On the View menu, click Search.
2 In the Search for devices or objects named text box, type the name of the object/device you wish to search for. You can use wildcard characters (* or ?) when typing criteria in this text box.
3 In the Look in text box, keep the initial setting, TAC Vista, to search from the top of the database. To search in a specific branch of the database, browse to that branch.
Select the Include subunits option to search in all subfolders/devices below the branch you have selected, in the Look in text box.
4 In the Type of devices or objects text box, keep the initial setting, Units, Logical Objects, to choose to search all types of objects. To search for a one or more object types, browse to and select the object type(s).
5 Click Search Now to start the search.
The result of a search will be displayed in a search result pane.
Vista Workstation displays a maximum of two search result panes. To display the search result in the second result pane, select the Display in Search Result 2 option.
136 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 12 Searching
If you want to limit the search to the first 1,000 items, select the Inter-rupt search if more than 1000 results option.
To search using the property values for objects/devices
Which properties are available depend on what object types you have selected in the Type of devices or objects text box. If you have selected Points, for instance, then all properties available for analog points, binary points and so on, for example, will be available.
Example: Searching for a value between 1,0 and 50
This example deals with searching for points with a value between 10 and 50.
1 Leave the Search for devices or objects named text box blank.
2 In the Look in text box, keep the initial setting, TAC Vista, to search from the top of the database.
3 In the Type of devices or objects text box, browse to and select Points.
4 In the Property value list, click Value. Select the Between option and type the values 10 and 50.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 137 (240)04-00022-02-en
12 Searching TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
5 Click Search Now to start the search.
Note
• Only select the Read property value from device option, if you are connected to the devices and Vista is in Operation mode.
138 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 12 Searching
Example: Searching for text in the description
This example deals with searching for text (a string) in a description, in this particular case all the objects/devices containing the text “tempera-ture”.
1 Leave the Search for devices or objects named text box blank.
2 In the Look in text box, keep the initial setting, TAC Vista, to search from the top of the database.
3 In the Type of devices or objects text box, select Units, Logical Objects.
4 In the Property value box, select Description. Type the text “*temperature*” (without the double quotes).
5 Click Search Now to start the search.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 139 (240)04-00022-02-en
12 Searching TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
140 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 13 Status Watch
13 Status Watch
13.1 Status Watch OverviewStatus watch pane is used for temporarily supervising objects/values in the Vista system.
Objects/Values can easily been dragged to status watch pane from the object view, a graphic, search result 1 or search result 2.
13.2 Adding Objects/Values to the Status Watch PaneTo add an object/value from a graphic
• In an open graphic, point and drag a value from the graphic and drop it into the status watch list in the status watch pane.
To add objects/values from the object view
• In the object view, select one or more objects/values, drag them from the object view and drop them into the status watch list in the status watch pane.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Tip
Alternate method:
• In the status watch list, right-click and then click Insert. Browse through the database. Select one or more objects/values and then click Open.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 141 (240)04-00022-02-en
13 Status Watch TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
To add objects/values from Search Result 1 or Search Result 2
• In search result 1 or search result 2, select one or more objects/val-ues, drag them from the search result and drop them into the status watch list in the status watch pane.
The objects/values will be added to the status watch list and automati-cally activated to display their value.
13.3 Deactivating/Activating Values in the Status Watch Pane
In front of each object/value displayed in status watch, there is an option (check box). If the option is selected, the value will be updated. If the option is not selected, the value will not be updated.
To deactivate objects/values in the status watch pane
• For each object/value in the status watch pane you do not want to see an updated value, clear the option in front of each object.
To activate objects/values in the status watch pane
• For each object/value in status watch pane that you want to see an updated value for, select the option in front of the object.
142 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 13 Status Watch
13.4 Creating an Online ChartTo create an online chart
1 In the status watch pane, right-click an object (row) and then click Start Online Chart.
2 In the online chart, right-click and then click Save as online chart.
3 In the Select dialog box, type a file name in the Object name text box and click Save.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 143 (240)04-00022-02-en
13 Status Watch TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
13.5 Using the Create Trend Log WizardFor more information see Section 16.2, “Creating a Vista Server Trend Log Using the Create Trend Log Wizard”, on page 161.
13.6 Viewing a Trend Chart
To view a trend chart from the status watch pane
1 In the status watch pane, right-click an object (row), point to View Trend Chart and then click the trend chart you wish to view.
A window opens displaying the trend chart you selected.
13.7 Removing Objects/Values from the Status Watch Pane
To remove objects/values from the status watch pane
1 Select one or more objects (rows) in the status watch pane.
2 Right-click and then click Remove.
Note
• This functionality is only available to an object/value that has been logged in a trend log, and the trend log is, directly or indi-rectly, included in one or several trend charts. Trend charts includes logged values from trend logs or trend log calculations.
Note
• Removing objects/values from the status watch pane will not remove them from the database, it will only remove them from the status watch pane.
144 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 14 Viewing/Changing Values
14 Viewing/Changing Values
14.1 Viewing/Changing Values OverviewTo view values in TAC Vista Workstation
Values are displayed in:
• Graphics
• The object view in detailed view, displaying the value column.
• The status watch.
• The properties dialog box of each object.
The value displayed will depend on which mode Vista Workstation is operating in:
• Engineering Mode. This mode is used when working offline. Val-ues displayed in Vista Workstation will be read from the Vista database.
Exception: For values that are updated by Vista when the corre-sponding device is online (dynamic values in pictures, in the Object window, and in the Status Watch and Search Results panes), the online values will still be displayed.
• Operating Mode. This mode is used when working online. Values displayed in Vista Workstation will be read from the devices con-taining the values.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• In a Vista network with several Workstations and one or several Servers, the selection Engineering/Operating mode is now (Vista 4.31) done per Vista Workstation and not, as previously, globally for the network. This means that setting one Worksta-tion in Engineering mode will not force the others to leave the Operating mode.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 145 (240)04-00022-02-en
14 Viewing/Changing Values TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
To change values in TAC Vista Workstation
Changing the value of an object can be performed in:
• Graphics
• The object view in detailed view, displaying the value column.
• The status watch.
• The properties dialog box of each object.
All commands performed on objects, that is creating objects, changing the value of an object, deleting objects and so on, are logged as events in the events list.
Electronic Signature when Changing a Value
If the electronic signature has been activated and applied to the object in question, you will have to type a user name, a password, selecting a cause for changing the value of the object. An optional comment can also be typed.
Changing a value in a dial-up system will cause a dial-up connection to activated to change the value of the device.
14.2 Viewing Values in the Object View
To view values in the object view
1 In the folders pane, browse to the point/value/shortcut you wish to change.
Notes
• Choosing to display the values column in the object view will cause Vista Workstation (in Operating mode) to try to retrieve the current values.
• When using a dial-up system, this will cause Vista Workstation to dial the devices in order to retrieve the values.
146 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 14 Viewing/Changing Values
2 In the object view, right-click (but not on an object), point to View and then click Details to make sure that object are displayed in detailed view.
3 Right-click the column header of the detailed view. Select the Value column and then click OK.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 147 (240)04-00022-02-en
14 Viewing/Changing Values TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
14.3 Selecting Columns in the Object ViewTo select columns in the object view
1 In the object view, right-click the header for the columns.
2 In the Select Columns tab, select the columns to be displayed and then click OK.
148 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 14 Viewing/Changing Values
14.4 Changing a Value in the Object ViewTo change a value in the object view
1 In the object view, click the value of the object you wish to change.
2 Type a new value and press ENTER.
Note
• To be able to change a value in the object view, you must use the detailed view and choose to display the Value column.
Tip
Alternate method:
• Right-click an object and then click Properties. In the Properties dialog box, type a new value and then click OK.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 149 (240)04-00022-02-en
14 Viewing/Changing Values TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
14.5 Enter an Electronic Signature when Changing a Value
To enter an electronic signature when changing a value
1 When the electronic signature is activated, changing a value will cause the Enter Electronic Signature dialog box is displayed.
2 In the Username text box, type the domain and user name for your user account, according to the syntax <domain>\<user name>, for example Vistadomain\john.
3 In the Password text box, type the password for your user account.
4 In the Cause text box. choose a pre-defined cause.
5 In the Comment text box, type an optional comment, and then click OK.
Notes
• If the Electronic Signature has been activated and applied to the object in question, you will have to type a user name, a pass-word, selecting a cause for changing the value of the object. An optional comment can also be typed.
• Changing a value in a dial-up system will cause a dial-up con-nection to activated to change the value of the device.
150 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 14 Viewing/Changing Values
14.6 Viewing Values in the Status Watch Pane
To view a value in the status watch pane
• In the object view, or in a search result pane, select one or more objects and drag them to the status watch pane.
Notes
• Selecting to display the values by dragging objects to the status watch pane, will cause Vista Workstation (in operating mode) to try to retrieve the current values.
• When using dial-up system, this will cause Vista Workstation to dial the devices in order to retrieve the values.
Tip
• By default, the Value column is displayed in the status watch pane. If the Value column is not being displayed, right-click the column header, choose to display the Value column, and click OK.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 151 (240)04-00022-02-en
14 Viewing/Changing Values TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
14.7 Changing a Value in the Status Watch PaneTo change a value in the status watch pane
1 In the status watch pane, look in the Value column and click the value of the object you wish to change.
2 Type a new value and press ENTER.
14.8 Xenta Server Pages OverviewA Xenta Server can provide the following pages which can be access by clicking the following objects in Vista Workstation:
• Xenta Server Url – Graphic
• Xenta Server Url – Values
• Xenta Server Url – Events
• Xenta Server Url – Alarms
• Xenta Server Url – Trend log
• Xenta Server Url – HTML
• Xenta Server Url – Time Object
14.8.1 Help for the Xenta Server Pages
When a Xenta Server page is displayed the graphical user interface from the Xenta Server web site is used. Thus, the Help accessible from the toolbar on the Xenta Server page is that of the Xenta Server web site, not the Vista Workstation Help.
When the Help button is clicked you will be informed how to download and view the help pages. Follow the instructions.
Tip
Alternate method:
• Right-click an object and then click Properties. In the Properties dialog box, type a new value and then click OK.
152 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 15 Online Charts
15 Online Charts
15.1 Online Charts OverviewOnline charts graphically display the current value of one or more objects/values in the Vista database. Online charts can support the dis-play of values using both a primary and a secondary y-axis.
By default, an online chart displays up to 86,400 values and updates the chart every 2 seconds. This is a setting that can be done for each chart, by right-clicking the chart and then clicking Edit Online Chart.
After displaying the number of values that the online chart is set to do, it will stop displaying values. To get the online chart to start displaying a new set of values, right-click and then click Clear, or press F5 on the keyboard.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 153 (240)04-00022-02-en
15 Online Charts TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
15.2 Creating an Online ChartTo create an online chart
1 In the object view, select one or more points or shortcuts, right-click and then click Start Online Chart.
2 In the online chart, right-click and then click Save as online chart.
154 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 15 Online Charts
3 In the Select dialog box, type a file name in the Object name text box and then click Save.
15.3 Opening an Online ChartTo open an online chart
1 In the folders pane, browse to find the online chart you wish to open. The object view displays the content of the folders pane.
2 In the object view, double-click the online chart to open it.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 155 (240)04-00022-02-en
15 Online Charts TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
15.4 Adding Values to an Open Online ChartTo add values to an open online chart
1 On the Windows menu, click Cascade.
2 In the object view, select one or more points or shortcuts and drag them to the online chart.
Note
• If you drop the value into the left side of the chart, the value will be displayed using the primary y-axis. If you drop the value into the right side of the chart, the value will be displayed using the secondary y-axis.
156 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 15 Online Charts
15.5 Editing an Online ChartTo edit an online chart
1 In the folders pane, browse to find the online chart you wish to modify. The object view displays the content of the folders pane.
2 In the object view, right-click the online chart and then click Properties.
Tips
Alternate methods:
• In an open online chart, right-click and then click Edit Online Chart. In the dialog box displayed, click the Online Charts tab. Click Add to add a value.
• In an open online chart, right-click and then click Insert a new series. In the Select dialog box, find and select a value and then click Select.
• In the object view, right-click the online chart and then click Properties. In the dialog box displayed, click the Online Charts tab. Click Add to add a value.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 157 (240)04-00022-02-en
15 Online Charts TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
15.6 Deleting an Online ChartTo delete an Online Chart
1 In the object view, right-click the online chart you wish to delete and then click Delete.
2 In the dialog box, click Yes to confirm.
15.7 Printing an Online ChartTo print an online chart
1 Right-click an open online chart, and then click Print.
2 The Windows Print dialog box of will be displayed. Select a printer and then click OK.
The paper size and orientation (portrait or landscape) are defined in the properties of the Windows Print dialog box.
158 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 16 Trend Logging
16 Trend Logging
16.1 Trend Logging Overview
16.1.1 Trend Logging
Trend logging is used to store measured values from a site, for example a carbon dioxide meter in an office, an outdoor thermometer, the energy usage from an energy meter and so on.
Trend logging can be used for a limited time only to help adjusting a system or a process, or, on a permanent basis, to store logged data for reporting for example energy usage.
The “Create trend log” wizards in Vista is used to set up trend logs and displaying them in trend charts.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 159 (240)04-00022-02-en
16 Trend Logging TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
16.1.2 The Trend Log Wizards
The trend log wizards are used to simplify logging and displaying data in Vista Workstation.
The trend log wizards use pre-defined trend log profiles to assist in cre-ating various types of trend logs.
Each trend log profile:
• Creates one trend log object.
• Can create four different types of trend log calculation; one per day, one per week, one per month and/or one per year. The trend log calculation objects can either be a sum or an average of the values from the trend log object.
• Can create a trend chart. It is also possible to reuse an existing trend chart. The trend chart can display values from the trend log objects or from the trend log calculation objects.
You can use the settings made by the trend log profile you have selected as they are, or you can make changes before finishing the wizard.
Fig. 16.1: Schematic view of a trend log wizard in Vista
00015893
TrendLog
TrendChart
Trend LogCalculation
160 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 16 Trend Logging
16.2 Creating a Vista Server Trend Log Using the Create Trend Log Wizard
To create a Vista Server trend log using the Create Trend Log wizard
1 In the object view, alarms, status watch or a graphic, right-click the object/value/shortcut you want to log, point to Create Trend Log, then click Vista Server Trend Log
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 161 (240)04-00022-02-en
16 Trend Logging TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
2 On the Welcome to the Create Trend Log Wizard page.
If you do not wish to see the welcome page again, select the Do not show this information page again option.
3 Click Next.
4 On the Trend Log Profile page, select one of the predefined trend log profiles suitable for the type of object/value you have selected to log.
If you are familiar with the selected profile, click Finish. The wiz-ard will create a trend log, a trend log calculation object and/or trend chart, that corresponds to the settings of the selected trend log profile.
162 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 16 Trend Logging
5 If you are not familiar with the trend log profile you have selected, click Next to view the settings suggested for that profile.
On the Trend Log Parameters page, you can view/change the log point, the path for saving the trend log object in the Vista database, and the name of the trend log object.
6 Click Next to continue.
On the Trend Log Profile page, you can view/change the settings for the trend log.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 163 (240)04-00022-02-en
16 Trend Logging TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
7 Click Next to continue.
On the Trend Log Calculation page, you can view/change a trend log calculation object and decide if you want to use it.
8 Click Next to continue.
On the Trend Chart page, you can view/change the settings of the trend chart.
9 Click Next to continue.
164 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 16 Trend Logging
10 On the Completing the Create Trend Log Wizard page, click Finish to create the objects in accordance with the selections you made in the wizard, or click Cancel to quit the wizard without cre-ating any objects.
Notes
• By default, trend logs, trend log calculation objects and/or trend charts are named after the selected log point and stored in the same location as the log point in the database.
• After you have clicked Finish in the wizard, Vista Workstation will verify if the program is in Operating mode. If that is not the case, a message asks you if you want to activate Operating mode. Click Yes to go to Operating mode and finish the wizard.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 165 (240)04-00022-02-en
16 Trend Logging TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
16.3 Creating a Xenta Trend Log Using the Create Trend Log Wizard
To create a Xenta trend log using the Create Trend Log wizard
1 In the object view, alarms, status watch or a graphic, right-click the object/value/shortcut you want to log, point to Create Trend Log, then click Xenta Trend Log
2 On the Welcome to the Create Xenta Trend Log Wizard page.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
166 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 16 Trend Logging
If you do not wish to see the welcome page again, select the Do not show this information page again option.
3 Click Next.
4 On the Xenta Trend Log Profile page, select one of the pre-defined trend log profile that is suitable for the type of object/value you have decided to log.
If you are familiar with the selected profile, click Finish. The wiz-ard will create a trend log, a trend log calculation object and/or trend chart, according to the settings of the selected trend log pro-file.
5 If you are not familiar with the trend log profile you have selected, click Next to view the settings suggested for that profile.
On the Xenta Trend Log Parameters page, you can view/change the log point, the path for saving the trend log object in the Vista database, and the name of the trend log object.
6 Click Next to continue.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 167 (240)04-00022-02-en
16 Trend Logging TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
On the Xenta Trend Log Profile page, you can view/change the settings for the trend log.
7 Click Next to continue.
On the Trend Log Calculation page, you can view/change a trend log calculation object and decide if you want to use it.
8 Click Next to continue.
On the Trend Chart page, you can view/change the settings of the trend chart.
9 Click Next to continue.
168 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 16 Trend Logging
10 On the Completing the Create Trend Log Wizard page, click Finish to create the objects in accordance with the selections you made in the wizard, or click Cancel to quit the wizard without cre-ating any objects.
Notes
• By default, trend logs, trend log calculation objects and/or trend charts are named after the selected log point and stored in the same location as the log point in the database.
• After you have clicked Finish in the wizard, Vista Workstation will verify if the program is in Operating mode. If that is not the case, a message asks you if you want to activate Operating mode. Click Yes to go to Operating mode and finish the wizard.
• To be able to use the wizard, you must have the authority to cre-ate trend logs in Vista and you must be working in Operating mode.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 169 (240)04-00022-02-en
16 Trend Logging TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
16.4 Trend Log Profiles
16.4.1 Using the Trend Log Profiles
The trend log wizard uses a number of predefined log profiles; they are suitable for logging different types of objects/values and can display them in an online chart. All the trend log profiles use the same measure-ment unit as the point/object you have select to log in a trend log.
The following default profiles are available:
• Temperature per hour
• Average Temperature per day
• Heating per 24 hours (before midnight)
• Heating per 24 hours (after midnight)
• Electricity per hour
• Electricity per 24 hours (before midnight)
• Electricity per 24 hours (after midnight)
• Water per 24 hours (before midnight)
• Water per 24 hours (after midnight)
• Carbon Dioxide (CO2) every 10 minutes
• Log a generic value every 10 minutes
For detailed information on each trend log profile, see Chapter 20, “Trend Log Profiles”, on page 221.
16.5 Viewing a Trend Chart
For detailed information on how to view a trend chart, see Chapter 9.6, “Viewing a Trend Chart”, on page 111.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
170 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 16 Trend Logging
16.6 Viewing Logged Values in a Trend Log as a Table
To view logged values in a trend log as a table
1 In the object view, right-click a trend log and click View Log.
2 When you have finished viewing the values in the log values dia-log box, click the Close button.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Notes
• If Vista Workstation is in Operating mode and the trend log being used stores logged values in a device, then Vista will connect to the device in order to retrieve the most recent logged values.
• If Vista Workstation is in Engineering mode, the logged values will be retrieved from the Vista database.
• If you view a Xenta Server trend log in Vista Workstation that is Man-Off, Vista will not connect to the Xenta Server in order to retrieve the most recent logged values, but only read values archived in Vista.
Tips
• The View Log dialog box will normally only show the 1,000 most recently logged values in a trend log. The value of how many logged values to display is set individually for each trend log object.
• You can override this setting and display all the values in a trend log by holding down the SHIFT key on the keyboard while click-ing on View Log.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 171 (240)04-00022-02-en
16 Trend Logging TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
16.7 Viewing Logged Values in a Trend Chart
To view logged values in a trend chart
1 Right-click the log for which you want to view the trend chart.
2 Point to View Trend, and then click one of the available trend(s). A trailing “(chart)” indicates that the trend chart is a Vista Work-station trend chart.
16.8 Viewing Logged Values on a Trend Page
To view logged values on a trend page
1 Right-click the log for which you want to view the trend page.
2 Point to View Trend, and then click one of the available trend(s). A trailing “(page)” indicates that the trend is a Xenta Server trend page.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Notes
• If Vista Workstation is in Operating mode and the trend log being used stores logged values in a device, then Vista will connect to the device in order to retrieve the most recent logged values.
• If Vista Workstation is in Engineering mode, the logged values will be retrieved from the Vista database.
• If you view a Xenta Server trend log in Vista Workstation that is Man-Off, Vista will not connect to the Xenta Server in order to retrieve the most recent logged values, but only read values archived in Vista.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
172 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 16 Trend Logging
16.9 Copying Trend Log Values to Microsoft Excel
To copy trend log values to Microsoft Excel
1 In the object view, right-click a trend log and click View Log.
2 In the log values dialog box, right-click and then click Copy.
3 Start Microsoft Excel. Select the A1 cell in an empty spreadsheet, right-click and then click Paste.
The values will be pasted into three columns, Date, Value and Origin.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 173 (240)04-00022-02-en
16 Trend Logging TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
16.10 Printing Trend Log Values
To print trend log values
1 In the object view, right-click a trend log and click View Log.
2 In the log values dialog box, click Print.
3 The Windows Print dialog box will be displayed. Select a printer and then click OK.
The paper size and orientation (portrait or landscape) are defined in the properties of the Windows Print dialog box.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
174 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 16 Trend Logging
16.11 Editing Trend Log ValuesTo edit trend log values
1 Right-click the trend log object you want to modify.
2 Select View Log.
3 Select the values you want to change.
4 Right-click and click Edit.
5 Change the value.
6 In the Edit dialog box, choose Just change the edited item if you just want to change one value. Choose Change all selected items if you want to change all selected items.
7 Click OK.
The modified values are now marked Edited.
All changed values are recorded in the event log and are easily checked.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 175 (240)04-00022-02-en
16 Trend Logging TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
16.12 Checking Edited Trend Log ValuesTo check edited trend log values
1 Right-click the trend log object and select View Events.
2 In the events list, click Filter.
3 Ensure that only Trend value changes is selected.
4 Click OK.
176 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 16 Trend Logging
5 In the events list, right-click the event you want to check and click Details.
6 The Event Details dialog shows the time of the editing, the old value and the new value.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 177 (240)04-00022-02-en
16 Trend Logging TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
16.13 I/NET Trend Samples
Assign a Trend Sampling extension to an I/NET point if you want to collect data to be used in a graph or printed in a report. This extension is available with all I/NET point types.
16.13.1 Adding/opening an I/NET Trend Sample
To add/open an I/NET trend sample
1 In the folder pane, expand the Xenta 527 server and locate the I/NET object.
This object is a container for I/NET points, point extensions, and configuration objects.
2 Expand the I/NET object and its underlying branches until the point type portion of the desired I/NET point is visible.
The following example shows I/NET point 55220004 DO selected in the folder pane.
3 Expand the point type portion of the I/NET point to view its avail-able HTML pages.
4 Click on the Trend Configuration page to view the point’s trend setup.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
178 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 16 Trend Logging
If the selected I/NET point already has a trend sample extension, the trend configuration page opens.
5 If the selected I/NET point does not already have a trend sample extension, you will be presented with a message asking if you would like to add the extension now.
Confirm that you wish to add the trend by clicking Yes. The trend configuration page opens.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 179 (240)04-00022-02-en
16 Trend Logging TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
16.13.2 Editing an I/NET Trend Sample
To edit an I/NET trend sample
1 From the open trend setup editor, use the available parameters to configure the I/NET trend. If necessary, refer to your I/NET Seven documentation for a detailed description of each parameter.
2 Click Save to save your settings.
3 At any time while working in the trend setup editor, you can click Graph to view the point’s trend chart.
16.13.3 Deleting an I/NET Trend Sample
To delete an I/NET trend sample
1 From the open trend setup editor, click Delete.
2 Confirm that you wish to delete the trend by clicking OK.
180 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 17 Time Functions
17 Time Functions
17.1 Time Charts OverviewThree types of time charts are available in Vista:
• Global Time Charts. This type of object (Time Chart – Global) can only be created in the top (root) level of the Vista database. Time charts of this type are visible and can be used on all comput-ers in a Vista system.
• Local Time Charts. This type of object (Time Chart – Local) can be created in folders below the top (root) level of the Vista data-base. Time charts of this type are only visible on the computer they have been created on.
• TAC Xenta Time Charts. This object type (Time Chart – TAC Xenta) is created in Menta, while programming an application for the Xenta device. This type of time chart can be modified in Vista Workstation.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Notes
• A Xenta time chart can be replaced by a central time chart.
• A central time chart is a time chart created in Vista Workstation, that is a global time chart or a local time chart.
• We recommend that you use a global time chart when replacing a Xenta time chart.
• It is possible to specify time intervals over the midnight hour.
• All alternative events will appear with a bold date in the calendar.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 181 (240)04-00022-02-en
17 Time Functions TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
17.2 Time Charts
17.2.1 Opening a Time Chart
To open a time chart
1 In the folders pane, navigate to the time chart you wish to open. The object View will display the content of the folders pane.
2 In the object view, double-click the time chart to open it.
182 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 17 Time Functions
17.2.2 Overviewing a Time Chart
• To get an overview of all time events, click All Events.
Notes
• Alternative Charts are shown with From and To dates (yearly alternative events appear with the year shown as “****”).
• Weekly events lack the From and To dates.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 183 (240)04-00022-02-en
17 Time Functions TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
17.2.3 Adding an Event in a Time Chart
To add an event to a time chart
1 In the time chart window, point to the time when you want the new event to start. Hold down the left mouse button and draw an area representing the time period for the new event.
2 Click New.
3 If necessary, modify the settings for the event and click OK.
.
Tip
Alternate method:
• Hold down the left mouse button and draw an area representing the time period for the new time event. Right-click, and click New. If necessary, modify the settings for the event and click OK.
184 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 17 Time Functions
17.2.4 Editing an Event in a Time Chart
To edit an event in a time chart
1 Double-click the event you wish to modify.
2 Modify the settings for the event and then click OK.
Tips
Alternate methods:
• Click the event you wish to modify and click Edit. Modify the settings for the time event and click OK.
• Click the event you wish to modify. Right-click the event and click Edit. Modify the settings for the time event and click OK.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 185 (240)04-00022-02-en
17 Time Functions TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
17.2.5 Deleting an Event in a Time Chart
To delete an event in a time chart
1 In the time chart window, click the event you wish to delete.
2 Click Delete.
3 Click Yes to delete the event.
Tip
Alternate method:
• Click the time event you wish to delete. Right-click the event and click Delete. Click Yes to delete the time event.
186 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 17 Time Functions
17.3 TAC Xenta Time Charts
17.3.1 Opening a TAC Xenta Time Chart
To open a TAC Xenta time chart
1 In the folders pane, browse to the Xenta time chart you wish to open.
2 In the object view, double-click the Xenta time chart to open it.
Notes
• Xenta time charts are located in the application modules of the Xenta devices.
• The Xenta devices are located in the networks below the Opera-tor Unit.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 187 (240)04-00022-02-en
17 Time Functions TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
17.3.2 Adding an Event in a TAC Xenta Time Chart
To add an event to a TAC Xenta time chart
1 In the time chart window, point to the time when you want the new time event to start. Hold down the left mouse button and draw an area representing the time period for the new event.
2 Click New.
3 If necessary, modify the settings for the event and click OK.
Tip
Alternate method:
• Hold down the left mouse button and draw an area representing the time period for the new event. Right-click, and click New. If necessary, modify the settings for the event and click OK.
188 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 17 Time Functions
17.3.3 Editing an Event in a TAC Xenta Time Chart
To edit an event in a TAC Xenta time chart
1 Double-click the event you wish to modify.
2 Modify the settings for the event and then click OK.
Tips
Alternate methods:
• Click the event you wish to modify and click Edit. Modify the settings for the event and click OK.
• Click the event you wish to modify. Right-click the event and click Edit. Modify the settings for the event and click OK.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 189 (240)04-00022-02-en
17 Time Functions TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
17.3.4 Deleting an Event in a TAC Xenta Time Chart
To delete an event in a TAC Xenta time chart
1 In the time chart window, click the event you wish to delete.
2 Click Delete.
3 Click Yes to delete the event.
Tip
Alternate method:
• Click the event you wish to delete. Right-click the event and click Delete. Click Yes to delete the event.
190 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 17 Time Functions
17.3.5 Replacing a TAC Xenta Time Chart with a Central Time Chart
You can replace a weekly chart, and/or an alternative Xenta chart for a Xenta device, with time charts created in Vista Workstation.
To replace a TAC Xenta Time Chart with a Central Time Chart
1 Open the Xenta time chart.
2 Click the Central Time Charts tab.
3 To replace the weekly time chart, browse to a time chart in Vista in the Week Chart text box.
4 To replace the alternative time chart, browse to a time chart in Vista in the Alternative Chart text box.
5 Click OK.
Note
• If an event in an alternative Xenta chart is defined for a specific date, then all normal week chart events for that date will be void.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 191 (240)04-00022-02-en
17 Time Functions TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
17.4 I/NET Time Schedule
17.4.1 I/NET Time Schedule
I/NET Time Schedule Types
Three types of I/NET Time Schedules are available in Vista:
• Master – Can be used as a base schedule for several points.
• Slave – Follows a specific master schedule, but allows you to define an offset period for each action or to even ignore the action entirely.
• Independent – Used only for a particular point. Its control deci-sions are not based on the schedule of any other point.
If an I/NET Time Schedule is opened by double-clicking it in the object view or opened from a color graphic, Vista will display the I/NET time schedule editor.
Using the I/NET time schedule editor, it is possible to define a schedule for a specific DC or DO point currently residing in a controller, for any day of the week.
I/NET Time Schedule
Each time schedule allows 17 entries (actions/times) to be added for each DC or DO point. Schedule actions can be entered in random order, with no attention paid to the chronological order of events. When you exit from the schedule, the controller rearranges the actions into chro-nological order for independent schedules. Master and slave schedule actions will remain in the order in which they were entered.
Each of the schedule types (Master, Slave, and Independent) also allows you to enter actions and times for alternate schedules (Temporary and Special Day schedules).
192 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 17 Time Functions
Example:
Modifying an independent time schedule.
1 From the I/NET Time Schedule Editor, click a blank entry line and then click the Add button. The Time Schedule Action Editor appears.
2 Select the appropriate action (for example Start).
3 Enter the appropriate time (24-hour format only).
4 Define the time schedule:
• If the entry is to be applied as a normal time schedule, select the days when the action is to be applied.
• If the entry is to be applied as an alternate schedule and you want it to recur each year (that is a standard holiday sched-ule), then select the Special Day schedule that is to be applied for that action.
• If the entry is to be applied as an alternate schedule during the current week, then select the Temporary schedule that is to be applied for that action
Note
• Special Day schedules for specific dates should be pre-defined using the Special Day Editor in I/NET.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 193 (240)04-00022-02-en
17 Time Functions TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
5 Click OK.
Your new entry should appear in the time schedule editor as seen below.
To tag a Day as Temporary
The spin dials in the I/NET time schedule editor allow you to tag any of the coming seven days as “Temporary”. When you tag a day as T1, I/NET issues only the commands that are applicable to Temporary Sched-ule 1. Days tagged as T2 will be issued only to those commands appli-cable to Temporary Schedule 2. If you tag a day as Both, then both T1 and T2 commands will be issued to the point.
Notes
• If you choose to use a temporary time schedule, for example T1, but you also want the normal time schedule for that specific day to be applied, then you will have to check the Temporary 1 checkbox in the Action Editor. A “Y” will be displayed in the T1 column for that normal day entry.
• The same applies to Special Day schedules. If you choose to use a Special Day schedule, for example S1, but you also want the normal time schedule for that specific day to be applied, then you will have to check the Special 1 checkbox in the Action Editor. A “Y” will be displayed in the S1 column for that normal day entry.
194 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 18 Dial-up Communication
18 Dial-up Communication
18.1 Dial-Up Communication OverviewDial-Up communication means establishing communication between a Vista Server and the network and devices of a site. Modems are used to dial-up and initiate a path of communication in order to send data and alarms from the site to the Vista Server.
Dial-up communication from the site is automatically initiated, when you open a dialog box, window or pane in Vista Workstation to view values or alarms.
The dial-up connection is automatically disconnected (after a time out) when all dialog boxes, windows or panes displaying values or alarms has been closed.
A dial-up connection can also be initiated by a device to send alarms or data to a Vista Server. After the device has finished sending alarms or data the dial-up connection is closed (after a time out).
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Tips
• Activate the auto-logout feature for all users in Vista systems that uses dial-up connections. The auto-logout will automatically log out any inactive users, closing any open dialog boxes, windows and panes in Vista Workstation.
• This will prevent an inactive user from keeping a dial-up connec-tion up and running.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 195 (240)04-00022-02-en
18 Dial-up Communication TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
18.2 Monitoring a Dial-Up Connection in ProgressWhen a dial-up connection is in progress, this will be displayed in the lower right corner of the status bar of Vista Workstation.
A telephone icon is displayed along with texts explaining the status of the connection in progress:
• Initialization. Information about the Vista Server and modem, along with the initialization string for the modem, is displayed, for example VistaSRV_1-Modem1: Initializing (ATS12=1).
• Dialing. While dialing, the number of seconds remaining is dis-played, for example: VistaSRV_1-Modem1:Dialing (Time left: 12 s).
• Error messages. If an error occurs, an error message will be dis-played in the tooltip, for example Error 417 (No dial tone).
When the connection has been established, information about the modem/dial-up connection will be removed from the status bar.
To monitor a dial-up connection in progress
1 Look at the lower right corner of the status bar in Vista Worksta-tion.
2 The status bar is automatically updated with information. If you have more than one modem, point to the telephone icon and a tool-tip will display information about all the available modems/dial-up connections.
196 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 19 I/NET Features
19 I/NET Features
19.1 The I/NET Host Tool
19.1.1 I/NET Host Tool Overview
Vista Workstation uses I/NET Seven as a tool for configuring I/NET objects.
If I/NET’s I/O server is not already running on your workstation, launching the I/NET host tool causes the I/O server to load automati-cally. In this case, an I/O server icon will appear in the system tray area of the Windows taskbar.
19.1.2 I/NET Licenses
The I/NET host tool provides a subset of the features that are found in a standard I/NET Seven system. The actual features provided by the I/NET host tool will depend on how I/NET is licensed in your Vista sys-tem.
The following two types of I/NET licenses are available:
• Integrated — Provides basic I/NET system functions as well as functions associated with HVAC.
• Security — Provides basic I/NET system functions as well as functions associated with access control.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• The actual I/O server icon that appears in the system tray will depend on how your I/NET system is currently configured. Refer to your I/NET Seven documentation for a complete description of all I/O server icons.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 197 (240)04-00022-02-en
19 I/NET Features TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
Licensed I/NET features
The following table lists the features that are available in TAC Vista Workstation for each type of I/NET license. The table also includes fea-tures that are common to both licenses. It is possible to have one, both, or neither license.
Table 19.1: Licensed I/NET Features
I/NET License
Feature Provided
Either license
The following features are common to both types of I/NET licenses. System features:
• Change password• Connect/disconnect• Logon/logoff
• Quit• Work offline
Host features:
• Host configuration editor• Host password editor• Host phone numbers editor• Host software restore editor
• Netcon function editor• Network configuration editor• System view
Tap features:
• Host, link, and site tap configuration• Site tap remote configuration
• Site tap save/restore
Controller features:
• 7720 configuration editor• Action messages summary• Alarm extension editor• Calculation editor• Control description editor• Conversion coefficient editor• DCU configuration editor• DCU save editor• DCU restore editor• DCU password editor• DPU configuration editor• Engineering units editor• Event extension editor• Event sequences summary
• I1/I2 stat parameters editor• Lighting circuits editor• Lighting zones editor• LCD page definition editor• Lookup table editor• MCU configuration editor• MR configuration editor• Resident point editor• Special days editor• State descriptions editor• Time schedule extension editor• Trend extension editor• Trend plot view dialog box
Summaries:
• Configuration summary• Controller summary
• Disabled points summary• Off-normal points summary
Reporting features:
• SevenReports (operates in view-only mode if no I/NET CD key is installed)
198 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 19 I/NET Features
Integrated The following features are only available with the “Integrated” I/NET license. Controller features:
• Consumption extension editor• DDC modules summary• Demand control extension editor• MR DDC Summary• Override billing equipment map-
ping editor• Override billing extension editor
• Override billing parameter editor• Runtime extension editor• Temperature control extension editor• Unitary control configuration editor• Unitary control extension editor
Security The following features are only available with the “Security” I/NET license. Controller access features:
• Elevator extension editor• DCU AIC editor• Door extension editor
• Personnel schedules• SCU parameters editor
Host access features:
• Access control options editor• Access control wizard• AIC editor• Door extension editor• Groups editor• Individuals editor• Key translation editor
Summaries• Door tenant summary
• Personnel schedules• Pin generation dialog box• Recycle bin• SCU editor• Tenant editor• User search
Table 19.1: Licensed I/NET Features (Contd.)
I/NET License
Feature Provided
TAC AB, Sept 2007 199 (240)04-00022-02-en
19 I/NET Features TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
19.1.3 Launch the I/NET Host Tool
There are two methods for launching the I/NET host tool:
• Application method — When you manually launch the I/NET host tool from Vista Workstation’s main menu, it launches as an appli-cation with all of the functions applicable to the installed license.
• Point-sensitive method — When you edit an I/NET object in Vista Workstation, the I/NET host tool automatically launches as a background task (that is, the main window is hidden) in order to display the appropriate I/NET editor.
To launch the I/NET host tool as an application
1 On the Tools menu, click TAC I/NET Host Tool.
2 If I/NET Seven is configured to automatically log you in using your Windows “user” account, the I/NET host application opens ready to use. Otherwise, you are presented with a login dialog box.
Login by typing a valid Operator Name and Host Password, and selecting OK.
To launch a point-sensitive I/NET editor
1 In the folder pane, locate the desired I/NET system point. Expand each branch of the I/NET point until the point type portion of the point is visible. See Section 19.2, “I/NET Points”, on page 201 for an example.
2 Right-click the I/NET point, select Edit, and then select an avail-able function. The I/NET host tool launches the appropriate I/NET editor.
200 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 19 I/NET Features
19.2 I/NET Points
19.2.1 I/NET Points Overview
I/NET points reside in the controllers that connect to the I/NET net-work. They are either external points such as a temperature sensor, internal points such as a calculation, or indirect points such as a com-mon outside air temperature among controllers.
19.2.2 I/NET Point Types
• Analog input (AI) points – AI points sense a variable and convert the input from current or voltage (analog value) to counts and then to a displayed value. It differs from a DI point in that it senses a value (such as 72 degrees) rather than a binary condition of one of two possible states.
• Analog output (AO) points – AO points also encompass pulse width modulated (PWM) outputs. AO and PWM outputs both use analog point processing. In I/NET, if you have a 7700, 7716, 7718, 7756, MR123-032MB, MR632, or 7728 I/SITE I/O controller, you have the option of using true AO points or PWM points. All other controllers provide only PWM points.
A true AO point uses a digital-to-analog converter to convert counts to analog signals. Typically the output, either 4–20 mA or 0–10 VDC, is used to reposition a device such as a valve actuator or damper operator.
A PWM point does not use a digital-to-analog converter. In terms of the hardware, a PWM output point is really a DO point operating with AO point processing. As the value of the PWM point varies, so does the pulse duration of the hardware output.
• Digital input (GI) points – This is a specialized DI point that requires the use of eight consecutive bit offset addresses. Only the first address (typically bit offset = 00) is defined in the database. The location of these addresses varies depending on the type of controller.
Digital input points create an equipment value based on the state of eight contacts using one point address and all eight of its associated bit offsets (values 00–07). Depending on the bit or bits energized, an equipment unit value, called “counts”, is produced.
Digital Input Conversion – The equipment unit value ranges from 0 to 255 (see table below). Equipment values are additive. For example, all contacts open results in an equipment unit value of zero (0); all contacts closed results in an equipment unit value of 255; contacts 00, 01, and 07 energized results in an equipment value of 131 (1 + 2 + 128 = 131).
TAC AB, Sept 2007 201 (240)04-00022-02-en
19 I/NET Features TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
• Digital output (GO) points – A GO point is a specialized DO point that, like the GI point type, requires eight consecutive point addresses.
As with the GI point, only the first address is defined. The next seven hardware inputs and addresses are not defined; however, they cannot be used for any other purpose. The point addresses for GO points vary by controller. On some controllers, these addresses will have the same point portion (PP), with bit offsets (BB) 00–07. On other controllers, the point portion (PP) will be different, and all bit offsets (BB) will be 00. Refer to your I/NET Seven documenta-tion for GO point addressing for specific controllers.
Digital output points energize up to eight consecutive discrete out-put points, based on an equipment unit value (X). Engineering unit value (Y) is converted to equipment unit value (X) using conver-sion coefficients.
Digital Output Conversion – The equipment unit value, called “counts” (X), ranges from 0 to 255. Calculation of the slope (m) and Y-intercept (b) is identical to that for an analog output point driving a D/A converter, except the equipment unit value (X) deter-mines which of the 8 discrete outputs will be energized (see the table below). Equipment values are additive. For example, if the equipment unit value (X) is 75, discrete outputs 1, 2, 4, and 7 are energized (1 + 2 + 8 + 64 = 75).
Table 19.2: Digital Input Equipment Unit Values
Point Address (bit offset) Equipment Unit Value
00 1
01 2
02 4
03 8
04 16
05 32
06 64
07 128
202 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 19 I/NET Features
• Discrete alarm (DA) points – This is a specialized DI point. Use it when you want to be aware of an alarm condition sensed by a contact opening/closing. Multiple contacts may be monitored for up to eight states for the point. For a binary (two-state) point, the two states of a DA point are NORMAL and ALARM. You deter-mine which state (0 or 1) is “normal”. This point may be super-vised (monitored for shorts or breaks in the line).
• Discrete input (DI) points – DI points sense the state of a contact that can be measured with single or multiple closures. The point is considered binary if it exists in one of two possible states: ON or OFF, OPEN or CLOSED, etc. The maximum number of states for a point is eight, which requires three contacts (bits).
Typical DI points are flow verification (yes/no) on a fan or pump, high level float switch closure, or door switch (open or closed). This point type may be supervised (monitored for breaks or shorts in the line), but it will not produce an alarm indication.
• Discrete monitor (DM) and discrete control (DC) points – These points are always used in a pair. They control devices that would otherwise be controlled by an ordinary DO point but are considered critical enough to warrant a DM/DC combination. The DC point does the actual controlling (opening and closing of the hardware contact) and the DM point provides positive feedback from an external discrete device (for example, an air flow switch).
The DM point is typically wired to a proof-of-flow switch that tran-sitions when the controlled device is started or stopped. It may also be used to monitor an auxiliary contact on a motor starter if a proof-of-flow switch is not installed. However, used in this way, the only information you are really receiving is that the contacts
Table 19.3: Digital Output Equipment Unit Values
Equipment Unit Value Discrete Output Energized
1 1
2 2
4 3
8 4
16 5
32 6
64 7
128 8
TAC AB, Sept 2007 203 (240)04-00022-02-en
19 I/NET Features TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
have closed or opened, but not whether the device is actually run-ning.
The DC point senses deviation between the commanded state and the monitored state, and provides an alarm if the controller com-mands the DC point ON or OFF and the DM point does not transi-tion. The DC point also generates an alarm if an external force alters the state of the DM input point and the output point was not changed; for example, an operator using a “Hand-Off-Auto” switch.
• Discrete output (DO) points – DO points control the state of binary outputs. These points are typically used for turning devices such as fans, pumps, and lights on and off. DO points are also used for door-related points (door strike) if you are using access con-trol. I/NET door points always use bit offset addresses of 08 or 09.
• Pulsed input (PI) points – PI or accumulator points accumulate pulses from the data environment and convert them into engineer-ing unit values. External PI points are capable of accepting pulses from such devices as electric demand pulse meters, flow meters, or other devices that convert a flow to a pulsed output. Internal accumulators can accumulate not only pulses but analog values as well, and in the case of an integrating accumulator, can convert an instantaneous rate input into a total value.
204 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 19 I/NET Features
19.2.3 Viewing I/NET Points
I/NET points associated with a Xenta 527 Server are accessible from the folder pane in TAC Vista Workstation. When you select an I/NET point in the folder pane, point-specific functions become available. Your abil-ity to access and use these functions will depend on whether or not the I/NET host tool is installed and how it is licensed. For more information on licenses, see Section 19.1.1, “I/NET Host Tool Overview”, on page 197.
To view I/NET Points
• Using the following graphic as an example, locate and expand branches in the folder pane to expose I/NET points and their sub-ordinate objects.
This example shows the point type portion of I/NET point 55220003 DC highlighted in the folder pane. For more information on point type, see Section 19.2.1, “I/NET Points Overview”, on page 201.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 205 (240)04-00022-02-en
19 I/NET Features TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
19.2.4 Selecting an I/NET Point
Many of the I/NET-related tasks that you can perform in Vista Work-station require that you first locate and select an I/NET point.
To select an I/NET point
1 In the folder pane, expand the Xenta 527 server and locate the I/NET object.
This object is a container for I/NET points, point extensions, and configuration objects.
2 Expand the I/NET object and its underlying branches until the point type portion of the desired I/NET point is visible.
3 Click on the point type portion of the I/NET point.
The following example shows I/NET point 55220003 DC selected in the folder pane.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
206 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 19 I/NET Features
19.2.5 Using Point-specific Features
To open point-specific HTML pages
1 Expand the point type portion of an I/NET point to view its avail-able HTML pages.
2 Select an HTML page to open it in Vista.
To open point-specific I/NET editors
1 Right-click on the point type portion of an I/NET point and select Edit.
2 Select a function to launch its associated I/NET editor.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• I/NET editors are only available from within Vista Workstation when its configuration includes the I/NET host tool.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 207 (240)04-00022-02-en
19 I/NET Features TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
19.2.6 Controlling an I/NET Point
In order to control an I/NET point from Vista, you must first open its point control editor. Vista provides an HTML-based editor for this pur-pose.
If your configuration of Vista Workstation includes the I/NET host tool, you also have the option of using I/NET’s point control editor.
To control an I/NET point
1 In the folder pane, locate the desired I/NET system point. Expand each branch of the I/NET point until the point type portion of the point is visible. See Section 19.2, “I/NET Points”, on page 201 for an example.
2 Open the point’s “Point Control” HTML page or launch I/NET’s point control editor. If necessary, refer to “Using Point-specific Features”, above, for instructions.
3 With the Point Control editor open, control an I/NET point using the following functions:
• Control State – This drop-down list allows you to select a control state for manual control of both input and output points. The list contains the state descriptions defined in I/NET”s State Descriptions Editor. The control commands that are actually sent to the point are defined in I/NET’s Con-trol Descriptions Editor.
• Download – Use this function to download the selected con-trol state to the point.
• Test On/Test Off – Allows you to toggle the point between the two options (test mode “ON” or test mode “OFF”). Use the Test mode to isolate one or more points from external hardware. This allows you to verify controller operation for selected points without affecting or using the external hard-ware. This also allows you to manually enter states/values for points.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Note
• While using the Test mode, the controller continues to update the database for the selected point. Your states/values for the point can be overridden by the controller. To prevent the controller from overriding you states/values, also place the point in Manual mode.
208 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 19 I/NET Features
• Manual/Automatic – Allows you to toggle the point between the two options (manual mode or automatic mode). Manual mode disables all automatic functions from controlling the external hardware (that is, ATS, DDC, Demand, and so on).
• Alarm Ack – Allows you to acknowledge an alarm if the selected point is in alarm.
• Release – (Door Outputs only) Allows you to momentarily release the output strike for a door.
• APB Reset – (Door Outputs only) Removes the anti-passback flags from the select door and any other doors within the same zone as the selected door. Use of this command causes I/NET to generate an audit trial message. Refer to Resetting the Anti-Passback Flag for more information.
Note
• While a point is in the Manual mode, the state/value you enter is also sent to the connected hardware.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 209 (240)04-00022-02-en
19 I/NET Features TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
19.2.7 Setting a Point’s Message Routing Parameters
To configure a point’s routing parameters for alarms/messages
1 In the folder pane, locate the desired I/NET system point. Expand each branch of the I/NET point until the point type portion of the point is visible. See Section 19.2, “I/NET Points”, on page 201 for an example.
2 Open the point’s “Alarm Configuration” HTML page or launch I/NET’s alarm configuration editor. If necessary, refer to Section 19.2.5, “Using Point-specific Features”, on page 207, for general instructions.
3 Choose a Distribution Group.
This will determine which set of 8 masks will be used for compar-ison at I/NET’s Tap or host level.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
HTML-based editor
I/NET editor
210 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 19 I/NET Features
4 Define the Distribution Mask. Activate or deactivate any of eight mask positions.
When a message is generated from the I/NET point, each of the point’s mask positions gets compared to corresponding mask posi-tions in the host or Tap. If any corresponding mask positions are activated at both the point level and Tap/host level, the point-related message data will be transmitted.
5 Choose a Message Priority setting. This setting controls when messages will be sent to the host computer.
6 Choose an Alarm Priority setting. This setting controls when alarms will be sent to the host computer.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 211 (240)04-00022-02-en
19 I/NET Features TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
19.3 I/NET Point Extensions
I/NET point extensions allow you to add pre-defined special functions to I/NET points. Not all point extensions are available for every I/NET point type. The following table shows the general function of each extension, and the point types which may use that extension.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
Table 19.4: I/NET Point Extensions
Point Extension
DescriptionI/NET Point
Types
Alarm Inhibit Prevents nuisance alarms that may occur when a piece of equipment is off.
AI, DA, DM, GI
Calculation Defines calculations on points to expand the capability of the controller or provide information that cannot be obtained from a sensor.
All point types
Consumption Directs the accumulated value of a PI point to a particular con-sumption cell for storage. Also zeroes the value stored in the DCU for the PI point at midnight.
PI
Demand Control
Monitors PI points for electrical power consumption, predicts demand, and maintains daily and monthly power consumption totals. Includes load shedding capability (ability to control points off). Not available on 7750, 7770, 7780, or 7791 con-trollers
PI
Elevator Sets access parameters for elevators. May only be used for door points (bit offset BB 08 or 09) defined as elevators. Each elevator will have associated DO (floor relay) and DI (floor selection button) points. This extension is only available in the 7791 DPI, 7793 MCI and 7798 I/SITE LAN
DO
Event Definition
Specifies a certain condition (event) and the response that con-dition initiates (event action or event sequence). Events are limited to specific point types.
All point types
Lighting Control
Controls lighting points by zone. Lighting control may be a cycle or a time schedule. This extension is only available in the 7780 DLCU.
DO
Override Billing
Allows you to use the 7750 Building Manager, with dial-in access, to control points residing in other controllers. This extension is only available in the 7750 DCU.
DO
Runtime Defines runtime parameters for a discrete point (input or out-put) so that runtime information can be collected for Docu-trend SevenTrends reports.
DC, DI, DO
212 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 19 I/NET Features
Temperature Control Controls output points managing HVAC units. Also provides optimized start/stop, night setback/setup control, and demand temperature override control.
DC, DO
Trend Sampling
Sets parameters for recording data from this point for graphs or Docutrend SevenTrends plots.
All point types
Time Scheduling
Controls output points according to the schedule entered. DC, DO
Table 19.4: I/NET Point Extensions (Contd.)
Point Extension
DescriptionI/NET Point
Types
TAC AB, Sept 2007 213 (240)04-00022-02-en
19 I/NET Features TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
19.3.1 Edit an I/NET Point Extension
TAC Vista Workstation provides an HTML-based point extension edi-tor for adding and editing two kinds of I/NET point extensions: time schedules (for DO and DC points only) and trend samples.
If your configuration of Vista Workstation includes the I/NET host tool, you also have the option ofadding and editing any type of I/NET point extension using I/NET’s point extension editors.
To edit an I/NET point extension
1 In the folder pane, locate the desired I/NET system point. Expand each branch of the I/NET point until the point type portion of the point is visible. See Section 19.2, “I/NET Points”, on page 201 for an example.
2 If you are editing a time schedule or trend sample extension, you can use the point’s Time Schedule or Trend Configuration HTML page, respectively. Alternatively, you can launch I/NET’s point extension editor for all types of point extensions.
If necessary, refer to Section 19.2.5, “Using Point-specific Fea-tures”, on page 207, for general instructions.
3 If the point extension that you are attempting to edit has not already been added to the selected point, you will receive a mes-sage asking if you would like to add the extension now. Click Yes to add the extension to the point.
4 In the point extension editor, use the available fields and options to edit the extension.
5 When you have finished editing the point extension, click OK.
Advanced
• The following information applies to complex tasks or tasks restricted by access.
214 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 19 I/NET Features
19.4 I/NET Alarms, Messages, and TransactionsI/NET alarms, messages, and transaction can be viewed from within Vista Workstation. You can view these items from any alarm or event pages that may have been added to the Xenta 527’s project, or from dynamic alarm and transaction viewers that are built into Vista. The information in this section describes Vista’s dynamic viewers.
19.4.1 Viewing I/NET Alarms and Transactions
To view I/NET alarms and transactions
1 Near the top of the folder pane, locate three alarm objects (for crit-ical, priority, and routine I/NET alarms) and one transactions object.
2 Click the Critical Alarms object. Critical I/NET alarms are dis-played in Vista.
3 Click any of the other objects to view other types of alarms or transactions.
Note
• The time it takes for Vista’s dynamic alarm and transaction view-ers to open is dependant on the number of messages active in the system.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 215 (240)04-00022-02-en
19 I/NET Features TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
19.4.2 Acknowledging I/NET Alarms
To acknowledge I/NET alarms
1 In the dynamic alarm viewer, highlight one or more I/NET alarms.
2 Acknowlege the alarm(s) using any of the following methods:
• Click the Acknowledge icon ( ) in the toolbar.
• Press F9.
• Right-click on any highlighted alarm and select Acknowl-edge.
3 Verify that the selected alarm(s) change to an acknowledged state in the alarm viewer.
19.4.3 Purging I/NET Alarms
To purge I/NET alarms
1 In the dynamic alarm viewer, highlight one or more I/NET alarms.
2 Purge the alarm(s) using either of the following methods:
• Click the Purge icon ( ) in the toolbar.
• Right-click on any highlighted alarm and select Purge.
3 Confirm that you wish to purge the selected alarm(s). Select Yes to confirm one alarm at a time, or select Yes to All to confirm all selected alarms.
4 Verify that the selected alarm(s) are purged from the alarm viewer.
216 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 19 I/NET Features
19.4.4 Filtering Alarms
To filter alarms
1 On the toolbar, click Filter ( ).
2 In the Alarm Filter dialog box, click appropriate tab and specify your filter options.
3 Click OK.
TAC AB, Sept 2007 217 (240)04-00022-02-en
19 I/NET Features TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
218 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
REFERENCE
20 Trend Log Profiles
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 20 Trend Log Profiles
20 Trend Log Profiles
20.1 Temperature per hour
This profile is used for logging indoor or outdoor temperatures once an hour.
Logging will start immediately after you have finished the trend log wizard, and will continue to log the temperature once an hour at the same time. The log is a circular one that logs the values for 106 weeks, before starting over.
A trend chart is created which displays the logged temperature.
Fig. 20.1: Log Profile: Temperature per hour
TrendLog
TrendChart
Thermometer
TAC AB, Sept 2007 221 (240)04-00022-02-en
20 Trend Log Profiles TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
20.2 Average Temperature per day
This profile is used for creating an average temperature for each day (24 hours).
Logging will start immediately after you have finished the trend log wizard, and will continue to log the temperature once an hour at the same time. The log is a circular one that logs the values for 106 weeks, before starting over.
A trend log calculations is created to save the average day temperature.
A trend chart is created which displays the average daily temperature.
Fig. 20.2: Log Profile: Average Temperature per day
TrendLog
Trend LogCalculation
Thermometer
TrendChart
222 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 20 Trend Log Profiles
20.3 Heating per 24 hours (before midnight)
This profile is used for logging heating (energy usage) once a day (24 h).
The profile is intended for logging the usage of the current day, and log-ging takes place 5 minutes to midnight. The log is a circular one that logs the values for 106 weeks, before starting over. The daily values are stored in the trend log.
A trend log calculation is created to save the usage per month.
No trend chart is automatically created.
Fig. 20.3: Log Profile: Heating per 24 hour (before midnight)
00015893
TrendLog
Trend LogCalculation
HeatingMeter
TAC AB, Sept 2007 223 (240)04-00022-02-en
20 Trend Log Profiles TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
20.4 Heating per 24 hours (after midnight)
This profile is used for logging heating (energy usage) once a day (24 h).
The profile is intended for logging the usage of the previous day, and logging takes place 5 minutes past midnight. The log is a circular one that logs the values for 106 weeks, before starting over.
To ensure the logged value is stored on the correct day, a trend log cal-culation object is also used. A second trend log calculation is used to save the usage per month.
No trend chart is automatically created.
Fig. 20.4: Log Profile: Heating per 24 hours (after midnight)
00015893
TrendLog
Trend LogCalculation
HeatingMeter
224 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 20 Trend Log Profiles
20.5 Electricity per hour
This profile is used for logging the hourly consumption of electricity.
Logging will start immediately after you have finished the trend log wizard, and will continue to log the usage of electricity once an hour at the same time. The log is a circular one that logs the values for 106 weeks, before starting over.
A trend chart is created which displays the logged usage.
Fig. 20.5: Log Profile: Electricity per hour
00015893
TrendLog
TrendChart
ElectricityMeter
TAC AB, Sept 2007 225 (240)04-00022-02-en
20 Trend Log Profiles TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
20.6 Electricity per 24 hours (before midnight)
This profile is used for logging electricity consumption (energy usage) once a day (24 h).
The profile is intended for logging the usage of the current day, and log-ging takes place 5 minutes to midnight. The log is a circular one that logs the values for 106 weeks, before starting over.
The daily values are stored in the trend log. A trend log calculation is created to save the usage per month.
No trend chart is automatically created.
Fig. 20.6: Log Profile: Electricity per 24 hours (before midnight)
00015893
TrendLog
Trend LogCalculation
ElectricityMeter
226 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 20 Trend Log Profiles
20.7 Electricity per 24 hours (after midnight)
This profile is used for logging electricity consumption (energy usage) once a day (24 h).
The profile is intended for logging the usage of the previous day, and logging takes place 5 minutes past midnight. The log is a circular one that logs the values for 106 weeks, before starting over.
To ensure the logged value is stored on the correct day, a trend log cal-culation object is also used. A second trend log calculation is used to save the usage per month.
No trend chart is automatically created.
Fig. 20.7: Log Profile: Electricity per 24 hours (after midnight)
00015893
TrendLog
Trend LogCalculation
ElectricityMeter
TAC AB, Sept 2007 227 (240)04-00022-02-en
20 Trend Log Profiles TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
20.8 Water per 24 hours (before midnight)
This profile is used for logging water consumption (usage) once a day (24 h).
The profile is intended for logging the usage of the current day, and log-ging takes place 5 minutes to midnight. The log is a circular one that logs the values for 106 weeks, before starting over.
The daily values are stored in the trend log. A trend log calculation is created to save the usage per month.
No trend chart is automatically created.
Fig. 20.8: Log Profile: Water per 24 hours (before midnight)
00015893
TrendLog
Trend LogCalculation
WaterMeter
228 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 20 Trend Log Profiles
20.9 Water per 24 hours (after midnight)
This profile is used for logging water consumption (usage) once a day (24 h).
The profile is intended for logging the usage of the previous day, and logging takes place 5 minutes past midnight. The log is a circular one that logs the values for 106 weeks, before starting over.
To ensure the logged value is stored on the correct day, a trend log cal-culation object is also used. A second trend log calculation is used to save the usage per month.
No trend chart is automatically created.
Fig. 20.9: Log Profile: Water per 24 hours (after midnight)
00015893
TrendLog
Trend LogCalculation
WaterMeter
TAC AB, Sept 2007 229 (240)04-00022-02-en
20 Trend Log Profiles TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
20.10 Carbon Dioxide (CO2) every 10 minutes
This profile is used for the level of carbon dioxide (CO2). Logging will start immediately after you have finished the trend log wizard, and will continue to log the level of carbon dioxide every 10 minutes.
A trend chart is created which displays the logged carbon dioxide level.
Fig. 20.10: Log Profile: Carbon Dioxide every 10 minutes
00015893
TrendLog
TrendChart
CO2Meter
230 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual 20 Trend Log Profiles
20.11 Log a Generic Value every 10 Minutes
This profile is for logging a generic value (that is any value) every 10 minutes.
The log is a circular one that logs the values for 8 weeks, before starting over. A trend chart is created which displays the logged values from the trend log.
Fig. 20.11: Log Profile: Log a Generic Value every 10 minutes
00015893
TrendLog
TrendChart
Log Point
TAC AB, Sept 2007 231 (240)04-00022-02-en
20 Trend Log Profiles TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
232 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual Index
IndexAalarm
disable 67icon 39interlock 68interlock, remove 80print 71purge 71view events 64view signal tripping the alarm 65
alarm statesin alarms list 59in disabled alarms list 77
Alarm View (menu) 28alarms 57
acknowledge 60alarms list
activate from the alarm icon 39alarm states 59filter 65resize column 60select colors 74select columns 75update 60
alarms paneopen 58
Cchange value 145
enter electronic signature 150column
choose in list 41hide 42move in list 41–42resize in events list 126resize in the alarms list 60resize in the disabled alarms list 78select in events list 134select in object view 148select in the disabled alarms list 84show 42
customizemain menu 29
Ddial-up communication 195
monitor a dial-up connection in progress 196disabled alarm
enable disabled 79open the disabled alarms pane 76view events 82
disabled alarms listalarm states 77print 81resize column 78select colors 83select column 84
drag and drop 37
Eelectronic signature
enter when changing a value 150event
view details 127Event View (menu) 28events 125
view for an alarm 131view for an object 130weekly 183yearly (****) 183
events listfilter 128find a text in 132print 132refresh 126resize column 126select column 134view events for an alarm 131view events for an object 130
events paneopen 126
FFile (menu) 28folders pane 24
Ggraphics 85
change a value in 92create an online chart for a value 93
TAC AB, Sept 2007 233 (240)04-00022-02-en
Index TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
navigate 85open 90open attached notes 97print 98scroll 96search 88view events for a value 93view trend chart for a value 94zoom in 95zoom out 95
Graphics (menu) 28
HHelp (menu) 28history
back 36forward 36
hyperlink 103open 103
II/NET alarm 215
acknowledge 216filter 217purge 216view 215
I/NET host tool 197I/NET licenses 197I/NET message 215I/NET point 201
controll 208extension, edit 214extensions 212select 206set point’s message routing parameter 210view 205
I/NET pointstypes 201
I/NET time schedule 192independent 192master 192schedule types 192slave 192tagging a day as temporary 194
I/NET transaction 215view 215
I/NET trend chartview 119
I/NET trend sample 178add 178delete 180edit 180open 178
interlock for an alarmremove 80
Kkeyboard shortcuts 38
Llinked objects
open in alarms list 63local server 47log in
local Vista Server (currently logged-in Windows user) 53
local Vista Server (Vista user) 50remote Vista Server (currently logged-in Windows
user) 54remote Vista Server (Vista user) 51remote Vista Server (Windows user) 55
log out 56logged values
view in a trend chart 172view on a trend page 172view trend log as a table 171
Mmain menu 28main menu, customize 29main shortcut menu 31main toolbar 30menu
add command 43Alarm View 28create 43Event View 28File 28Graphics 28Help 28Objects 28Online Chart 28show full contents without a delay 29Tools 28Trend Chart 28View 28Window 28
menu bar 24mode
change 56
Nnotes 99
edit 101open 100
234 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual Index
print 102
Oobject view
select column 148value, change 149view value 146
Objects (menu) 28online chart 153
add value to 156create 154create from alarms list 72create from status watch pane 143delete 158edit 157open 155print 158
Online Chart (menu) 28
Ppanes 24, 32
buttons 32close 33display a hidden pane 33hide 33move 33unhide 33
password, change (Vista user) 52program settings
load my program settings 45reset program settings 45save my program settings 45
Rremote server 47report 121
open 122print 124
report copyopen 123
Ssearch 135
device 136object 136
search pane 24shortcut menu, main 31shortcuts, keyboard 38standby mode 50
activate 56status bar 25, 35status watch pane 141
activate value in 142add object to 141add value to 141change a value 152deactivate value in 142online chart, create 143remove object from 144remove value from 144view trend chart 144view value 151
TTAC Vista Server
start 48stop 48
TAC Vista Workstationstart 48stop 48
TAC Xenta Server 47TAC Xenta time chart
add an event 188delete an event 190edit an event 189open 187replace with a central time chart 191
taskbar 24time chart 181
add an event 184central time chart 181delete an event 186edit an event 185global time charts 181local time charts 181open 182overview 183TAC Xenta time charts 181
time schedulesover midnight 181
title bar 24, 26toolbar 24
add command 43create 43
toolbar, main 30Tools (menu) 28tools menu
add command 44trend chart 105
add trend log to 108create 106delete 114edit 110open 107print 115
TAC AB, Sept 2007 235 (240)04-00022-02-en
Index TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
view 111, 170view edited value 117view estimated value 117view event 116view for an alarm 73view from status watch pane 144view logged values 172
Trend Chart (menu) 28trend log
create from alarms list 72view logged values as a table 171
trend log profiles 170, 221trend log values
check edited 176copy to Microsoft Excel 173edit 175print 174
trend log wizardcreate Vista Server trend log 161create Xenta trend log 166
trend logging 159trend log wizard 160
trend pageview logged values 172
Uuser interface 23
customize 40
VView (menu) 28view value 145
object view 146Vista Server trend log
create, using the wizard 161
WWindow (menu) 28window buttons 27window menu 27windows 25, 34
buttons 34navigating 35resize 35
workspace 24
XXenta Server page 152Xenta trend log
create, using the wizard 166
236 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual Index
TAC AB, Sept 2007 237 (240)04-00022-02-en
Index TAC Vista Workstation, Operating Manual
238 (240) TAC AB, Sept 200704-00022-02-en
Copyright © 2007, TAC ABAll brand names, trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Information con-tained within this document is subject to changewithout no-tice. All rights reserved.
04-00022-02-en
Europe / Headquarters Malmö, Sweden +46 40 38 68 50
Americas Dallas, TX +1 972-323-1111
Asia-Pacific Sydney, Australia +61 2 9700 1555
www.tac.comLast Manual Page
-
HomePro ZIR000
ZIR000 Instructions, Release 1.1P/D 110805HomeProby ADVANCED CONTROL TECHNOLOGIES, INC.0685-011Radio Frequency Transmitter, Battery Powered,Wall Mounted Passive Infrared (PIR) Sensor, Release 1.1ZIR000HomeProRF Home AutomationShown with suppliedwall mount bracketZIR000 WALL MOUNTED SENSORThe ZIR000 Wall Mounted Sensor …
ZIR000 Security System, 4
-
NTI ENVIROMUX Series
ENVIROMUX-SRN-A Adjustable Siren, 114dB Installation Instruction The ENVIROMUX-SRN-A Adjustable Siren is used to deter intruders and alert personnel of alert conditions when used in conjunction with an ENVIROMUX-MINI-LXO, ENVIROMUX-SEMS-16, ENVIROMUX-SEMS-16U or ENVIROMUX-2D/-5D/-16D Server Environment Monitoring Sy …
ENVIROMUX Series Security System, 2
-
SC&T RemoteCam5
RemoteCam5™ Quick Install DATE: 8/28/15 PRELIMINARY www.soundcontrol.net 203-854-5701 ©SOUND CONTROL TECHNOLOGIES, INC. 2015 Thank you for choosing the Sound Control Technologies’ RemoteCam5™ camera integration kit! Included in each RemoteCam5™ kit will be: 1 Power Supply & cord (Currently all Re …
RemoteCam5 Security System, 2
-
Menvier Security TS690
TS690 & TS690ID Intruder Alarm Control Panels _ ~Engineers menu 2 Select option :-_ ~OPEN _ ~Engineers menu 2 Select option :-_ ~ _ ~ OPEN 1A D C B 2 3 7 654 8 9 0ENT ESC _ ~SYSTEM OPEN 17:30 01 Jan SILEN TZ ON E OM IT CH IMENE W CO D E 24 Hr OMIT W AL K TESTB ELL TES TPar t Set Par t Set Part Set RE SET 1A B C …
TS690 Security System, 48
-
Renkforce RF-PM-01
ProduktanwendungVerbinden Sie den Passwort-Manager mit einem geeigneten Computer. Das Gerät wird als Laufwerk erkannt. Starten Sie (per Doppelklick) das Programm „Password Manager“ im „Win-dows Explorer“. Es öffnet sich ein Programmfenster. Wählen Sie Ihre bevorzugte Sprache aus und geben Sie ein sicheres M …
RF-PM-01 Security System, 8
-
NAPCO Gemini GEM-P816
HARDWIRE WIRELESSWI994A 10/99© Napco 1999RGEM-RP1CAe2 KeypadRARMEDSTATUS� …
Gemini GEM-P816 Cell Phone, 52
-
Flamingo HA31S
GEBRUIKERSHANDLEIDINGUSER MANUALMODE D’EMPLOIBETRIEBSANWEISUNGINSTRUKCJA OBS³UGIFELHASZNÁLÓI KÉZIKÖNYVPRIRUÈNIK ZA KORISNIKENÁVOD K POUŽITÍPRIROÈNIK ZA UPORABNIKAHA31SDRAADLOOS ALARMSYSTEEM VOOR HET BEVEILIGEN VAN HUIZENWIRELESS HOME SECURITY ALARM SYSTEMSYSTÈME D’ALARME SANS FIL POUR HABITATIONKAB …
HA31S Security System, 24
-
American Dynamics AD2032
FEATURESThe AD2096 Series Alarm Interface Unitconverts sixty-four hardwire alarm inputs toAD alarm contact numbers for use by AmericanDynamics Matrix Switcher/Controller systems.The matrix switcher/controller systems can beprogrammed to automatically switch videoinputs to video outputs, display presets, andactivate aux …
AD2032 Security System, 2